McLaren MP4-12C - Maintenance Manual - Owners Manual

Repair Procedures: Suspension – Z-Bar 141
Suspension – Wheel Alignment 144

Fender Cover Inner 2 Wheel Liner Rear 146
Adjust Headlamp 4 Engine Oil – Change 149
Luggage Bin 5 Turbo Oil Return Hose 156
Bleed Steering Fluid 7 Air Filter – Replace 159
Engine Oil Level 9 Coolant – Drain Fluid 161
Lift Vehicle 13 Clutch – Drain Fluid 170
Wheel – Remove 15 Clutch – Replace Filter 175
Brakes – Check Brake Discs 17 Floor – Diffuser Floor Panel 177
Front Brakes – Pads 37 Transmission – Drain Fluid 180
Front Brakes – Calipers 41 Transmission – Replace Filter 183
Front Brakes – Discs 46 Fuel Filter – Replace 185
Front Brakes – Hoses 49 Body – Remove Door Cover 190
Rear Brakes – Pads 54 Body – Remove Lower Rear 191
Rear Brakes – Calipers 58 Body – Remove Side Lower 197
Rear Brakes – Discs 62 Body – Remove Radiator Grills 199
Rear Brakes – Hoses 66 Intake Sound Generator – Replace 201
Parking Brakes – Pads 71 Engine Compartment Side Cover 203
Parking Brakes – Actuator 74 Spark Plugs – Replace 208
Parking Brakes – Caliper 77
Brakes – Bleed 80 Service Sheets:
Brakes – Bed 88
Floor – Engine and Fuel Tank Panel 91 Mileage Dependent Tasks 215
Floor – Front Panel 93 1 Year / 10k Mile 216
Floor – Tunnel Panel 96 2 Year / 20k Mile 221
Floor – Rear Lower Extension Panel 98 3 Year / 30k Mile 226
Floor – Guide Vanes 102 4 Year / 40k Mile 231
Floor – Transmission Panel 106 5 Year / 50k Mile 236
Suspension – Front Upper Wishbone 108 6 Year / 60k Mile 241
Suspension – Front Lower Wishbone 111 7 Year / 70k Mile 245
Suspension – Rear Upper Wishbone 114 8 Year / 80k Mile 250
Suspension – Rear Lower Wishbone 118 9 Year / 90k Mile 255
Suspension – Steering Track Rod 122 10 Year / 100k Mile 260
Suspension – Front Upright 125 11 Year / 110k Mile 265
Suspension – Front Hub 128 12 Year / 120k Mile 270
Suspension – Rear Tie Rod 130 13 Year / 130k Mile 275
Suspension – Rear Upright 133 14 Year / 140k Mile 289
Suspension – Rear Hub 137 15 Year / 150k Mile 285
Suspension – Rear Drop Link 139 Track Inspection 290
1
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Roof Panels Fenders Fuel Filler / AA-RM-02A04-03-001 - Remove/install fender cover - Inner
Remove fender cover - Inner
Care Work carefully to prevent paint
Point: damage.
1. Open luggage compartment lid.
Care Start pulling up cover fender from

Point: rear edge.
2. Remove fender inner (1).
Install fender cover - Inner
2
Care Start with front edge because of firtree clip and ensure alignment with hole.
Point:
1. Install components in reverse order.
3
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Frontlamps Side Markers / AA-RM-02A02-04-003 - Adjust headlamp
Preparation work
1. AA-RM-02A04-03-001 Remove/install fender cover - Inner
Care Use suitable headlamp alignment equipment.

Point:
Care First technician carries out adjustment, whilst second technician operates headlamp alignment equipment.
Point:
Adjust headlamp
Care Inboard adjuster for vertical
Point: adjustment, outboard adjuster for
horizontal adjustment.
1. Use adjuster for vertical adjustment (1).
2. Use adjuster for horizontal adjustment (2).
Care Height equals 62cm with

Point: inclination of -1.2%. Ensure dipped
beams are +/- 0.1% of 1.2%.
3. Carry out adjustment to country specific

legislation in regards to angle and height.
4. Check headlamp functionality.
4
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Luggage Cell Ducts Wheelarch Liners / AA-RM-02A02-03-004 - Remove/install luggage bin - Rear
Remove luggage bin - Rear
1. Open luggage compartment lid.
2. Remove contents of luggage bin.
3. Remove luggage bin finisher.
4. Remove bolts (1). M6 x 16 4 Nm
5. Remove fixings (2).
6. Remove luggage bin (3).
Install luggage bin - Rear

5
Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Luggage Cell Ducts Wheelarch Liners / AA-RM-02A02-03-004 - Remove/install luggage bin - Rear
Description Dimension Value
Bolt luggage bin - Rear M6 x 16 4 Nm
6
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / D01 Steering System / Steering System / AA-RM-03D01-01-008 - Fill/bleed fluid - Steering system
WARNING!
Risk of injury and poisoning working with hydraulic fluid under pressure!
Risk of injury to skin or eyes from hydraulic fluid spraying out under pressure. If any part of the hydraulic circuit has failed, a
possibility of the system not depressurising can occur. Extra precaution is required in this event. If hydraulic fluid is swallowed, this
can lead to poisoning symptoms such as headache, dizziness, nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, cramps and unconsciousness.
Always wear skin protection cream, protective gloves and safety glasses when working on a potentially pressurised system.
Fill/bleed fluid - Steering system

1. Open bonnet.
2. Remove power steering reservoir cap (1).
3. Fill up power steering reservoir (1.5 litres

maximum). Pentosin CHF202
Care Ensure the car is on the ground.

Point:
4. Turn steering wheel from lock (A) to lock (B)

three times. 7
5. Check power steering fluid and fill up if
necessary.
Care Ensure the car is on the ground.
Point:
4. Turn steering wheel from lock (A) to lock (B)

three times.
5. Check power steering fluid and fill up if
necessary.
6. Install power steering reservoir cap.
8
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / F02 Oil System Engine / Oil System Engine / AA-RM-04F02-01-007 - Check oil level
Check oil level
Care The oil level check is completed
Point: with the engine running at
2000rpm for 40 seconds.
1. The following conditions must be met to allow

an engine oil level check to be carried out:
Care • The vehicle must be stationary
Point: and positioned on a level
surface.
• Engine running with the throttle
pedal fully released.
• Neutral gear selected and the
foot brake applied (use left
foot).
If any of these conditions are not
met, a warning message will be
displayed on the instrument
cluster.
Care The foot brake must be applied for

Point: the entire duration of the oil level
check.
Care The oil level status can be viewed

Point: in the Vehicle information section
in the left hand instrument cluster
display.
2. Start the engine and navigate to the left hand

cluster display to oil level check.
3. If all prerequisite conditions have been met
you will be taken to the apply throttle screen.
9
Point: in the Vehicle information section
in the left hand instrument cluster
display.
2. Start the engine and navigate to the left hand

cluster display to oil level check.
3. If all prerequisite conditions have been met
you will be taken to the apply throttle screen.
Care Allow the engine oil temperature to

Point: reach a temperature of 70°C
(measured via the oil level
sensor).
Care The oil level check will limit the

Point: rpm input to 2000rpm once the
test has begun, but the throttle
must be applied for the duration of
the oil level check. If the throttle
pedal is released and the engine
speed drops below 2000 rpm
during the oil level check, then the
oil level check will abort, and
return you to the apply throttle
screen.
The 40 second countdown timer
will begin when the oil temperature
has exceeded 40°C.
10
4. Apply throttle and raise the engine speed to
2000 rpm.
pedal is released and the engine
speed drops below 2000 rpm
during the oil level check, then the
oil level check will abort, and
return you to the apply throttle
screen.
The 40 second countdown timer
will begin when the oil temperature
has exceeded 40°C.
4. Apply throttle and raise the engine speed to

2000 rpm.
The 40 second countdown timer will begin
when the oil temperature has exceeded 40°C.
Care The line on the display indicates
Point: the target oil level.
Care Once the oil level check has been

Point: completed and returned a value,
do not continue to test the system.
This may lead to aeration of the oil
and return a false value. To end
the oil level check, release the
throttle and abort back to the
vehicle info menu.
5. When the timer has reached '0
Care When the timer has reached '0

Point:
Care The engine must be switched off

Point: and the instrument cluster must be
returned to the vehicle info menu
before carrying out an oil top up
and retest.
6. If the engine oil is below target level, top up

with the correct quantity of oil, in accordance
to the graphic opposite. Approximately 0.50
litres is required to raise the level from
minimum to target level.
7. Carry out the oil level check process to ensure
the level is correct.
8. Top up as required by repeating steps 1-6.
11
the oil level check, release the
throttle and abort back to the
vehicle info menu.
5. When the timer has reached '0
Care When the timer has reached '0

Point:
Care The engine must be switched off

Point: and the instrument cluster must be
returned to the vehicle info menu
before carrying out an oil top up
and retest.
6. If the engine oil is below target level, top up

with the correct quantity of oil, in accordance
to the graphic opposite. Approximately 0.50
litres is required to raise the level from
minimum to target level.
7. Carry out the oil level check process to ensure
the level is correct.
8. Top up as required by repeating steps 1-6.
12
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-007 - Lift vehicle on lifting platform
DANGER!
Risk of death working with lifting platforms!
Care must be taken while working with the lifting platform. Death may occur if a vehicle slips or topples off the lifting platform.
Position the support plates on the lifting platform support points at the same height.
• Raise the vehicle a few inches first (wheels are still touching the ground) and check the position and fit of the support plates and
lift points before raising the vehicle to the full lifted position.
• Do not raise the vehicle off the lifting platform plates when components are being supported.
• Centre the vehicle lengthwise and crosswise between the lifting platform columns.
• Comply with all relevant statutory and accident prevention regulations.
Lift vehicle
13
Care Ensure vehicle is in correct
Point: orientation to allow door opening.
Care Ensure lifting arm pads do not

Point: obstruct removal of floor panels.
1. Carefully position lifting arms on jacking points

(1).
2. Raise vehicle.
14
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B03 Wheels Tyres / Wheel Assembly / AA-RM-03B03-01-001 - Remove/install wheel
Preparation work
1. AA-RM-02A04-04-007 Secure/lift vehicle on lifting platform
Remove wheel
1. Remove wheel bolts in sequence A - E. 130
Nm
2. Remove wheel (1).
Install wheel
15
Care Ensure that the tyres are in the correct orientation. All Pzero, all winter, and rear corsa tyres are asymmetric.
Point: Front corsa tyres are directional.
Care Measure tread depth, check rim and tyre for any damage.
Point:
2. Check tyre pressure and correct, if necessary.
Care Once vehicle is on ground.

Point:
3. Apply pressure to top of wheel towards vehicle. If excessive inward movement of wheel is present, the upper ball joint
has failed. The wishbone will require replacing.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B03 Wheels Tyres / Wheel Assembly / AA-RM-03B03-01-001 - Remove/install wheel
Bolt Wheel 130 Nm
16
nstructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-006 - Cleaning/ Checking carbon ceramic brake disc (CCM)/Iron brake disc
(Fe)
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/install wheels
3. AA-RM-03C01-01-002 Remove/install brake caliper - front
5. AA-RM-03C01-01-003 Remove/install brake - Disc - front
6. AA-RM-03C02-01-002 Remove/install caliper parking brake
7. AA-RM-03C01-03-001 Remove/install brake caliper - rear
9. AA-RM-03C01-03-002 Remove/install brake disc - rear
Cleaning/ Checking carbon ceramic brake disc (CCM)/Iron brake disc (Fe)
1. When carrying out this procedure the following safety equipment must be worn – dust mask, sleeve protection, and plastic
gloves.
Care Only pick up the disc from the bell housing. Do not handle from the ventilation channels.
Point:
Care Cleaning of the discs, pads, and cross drilled holes must be carried out before replacement.
Point:
Care It is important to keep all pads and discs free of dirt/ grease as these impurities can cause a loss of friction when braking.
Point:
Care Do not under any circumstances soak brake discs/pads in solvent. Solvent must not be absorbed by the composite
Point: material.
17
Care Pads and discs can only be cleaned with acetone solvents. Under no circumstances can standard brake cleaner be used.
Point:
Care The use of a fine grade sand paper to lightly rub the surface is permissable.
Point:
Cleaning carbon ceramic brake disc (CCM)/Iron brake discs (Fe) and pads
1. Clean Iron brake discs (Fe) and pads.
Care Do not machine cross drilled holes.

Point:
Care Do not flare cross drilled holes.

Point:
Care Do not carry out any form of grinding on the disc.

Point:
Care Cleaning of the discs, pads, and cross drilled holes must be carried out before replacement.
Point:
Care Only use screwdriver/ punch with a max diameter of 5mm to clean cross drilled holes.
Point:
Cleaning cross drilled holes
18
1. Use a screwdriver/ punch (A) to initially clear
the cross drilled holes of composite build up.
2. Once all holes are cleared, use a pressurised

air gun (B) to clean out the final remnants of
build up.
19
2. Once all holes are cleared, use a pressurised
air gun (B) to clean out the final remnants of
build up.
Disc replacement required
20
Care Discs must be renewed in axle sets.
Point:
Care The brake bedding procedure must be carried out whenever discs are renewed. This is to ensure a good
Point: mating condition between the pad and disc.
Care When discs are renewed, pad wear must be checked. If pad wear has not reached 50%, they can be re-used
Point: if the brake bedding procedure is repeated. If this procedure is not observed, the disc may fail when sufficient
pressure is applied when braking.
Care If any of the below conditions occur, the disc must be replaced regardless of the mileage covered by
Point: the vehicle
1. The weight is within 20g of the minimum weight of the disc as stated on the bell or minimum thickness has
been reached.
2. The comfort level of the disc has reached an unacceptable condition.
3. There has been an excessive drop in braking performance.
4. The disc has been subjected to accidental damage.
5. The disc face has been damaged due to 100% pad wear (metal to disc contact).
6. If the vehicle has been involved in an accident where a wheel face has been impacted.
For points 1, 2, and 3, these will occur to the brake discs through normal use over time.
Care Please note that the CCM disc will only show signs of wear in two cases. These are if the vehicle has
Point: experienced hard use such as racing, or if the temperature experienced by the disc is greater than 500° C. In
these situations, the composite within the discs will begin to oxidize, which leads to a more pronounced drop
off in disc weight.
Care If the vehicle is driven in an aggressive manner or experiences a lot of cornering, an increase in disc/pad
Point: wear will be experienced.
1. If required, replace disc.
Checking Iron brake disc – Visual inspection of surface/ wear
21
Care Cracks will appear on the disc
Point: surface if it has been subjected to
excessive thermal cycling.
1. If disc surface contains cracks originating from

a cross drilled hole (1), it must not exceed
20mm in length. If crack is greater than this,
disc must be replaced.
A 20mm
B 5mm
2. If disc surface contains cracks originating from
a cross drilled hole that joins a crack from an
adjacent hole (2), disc must be replaced.
3. If disc surface contains cracks that go within
5mm of the outer (3), or inner edge (3), disc
must be replaced.
Care Differential wear must not exceed
Point: 0.5mm side to side.
4. Minimum disc thickness are 30mm (Front)/

28mm (Rear).
Care Please note CCM discs do not lose performance once the braking surface shows indications of being worn, so may still
Point: be used.
On CCM discs, it is common for the braking surface to change visually during use. The change is caused by temperature
variance between the face of the disc and the ventilation channels. Please note that this does not affect the performance
of the disc.
Care If cross drilled holes are blocked by CCM material, discs must be fully cleaned.
Point:
Checking carbon ceramic brake disc – Visual inspection of surface/ wear
22
Care If there is a build up of CCM on the
Point: internal diameter of the disc (1),
this is due to it having a higher
wear rate at the inner part of the
disc (1).
1. This condition (C) should be matched by the

pad (2). Please note that this does not affect
the performance of the disc (1).
Care Discs must be replaced if pad

Point: wear has reached 100%.
If pads have reached 100% wear,
there is a high chance that the
back plate has come into contact
with the braking face (visible mark
will be present).
2. Discs (1) must be replaced immediately if this

circumstance has occurred due to
contamination of the disc (1).
23
Care Discs must be replaced if pad
Point: wear has reached 100%.
If pads have reached 100% wear,
there is a high chance that the
back plate has come into contact
with the braking face (visible mark
will be present).
2. Discs (1) must be replaced immediately if this

circumstance has occurred due to
contamination of the disc (1).
Care Any visual change to the braking

Point: surface of the disc is caused when
the fibres within the CCM
experience a high level of thermal
input. This then causes the fibres
to oxidize, changing the surface
appearance. This condition mainly
occurs after extreme use, such as
racing.
The oxidisation level is calculated
by disc porosity and surface
roughness. Areas that are mainly
affected by the change in the
braking surface are an increase in
pad wear, decreased NVH, and a
decrease in disc performance.
If the level of oxidisation
experienced is very high, the disc
must be replaced. See below for
examples of the different levels of
24
oxidisation experienced:
Care Any visual change to the braking
Point: surface of the disc is caused when
the fibres within the CCM
experience a high level of thermal
input. This then causes the fibres
to oxidize, changing the surface
appearance. This condition mainly
occurs after extreme use, such as
racing.
The oxidisation level is calculated
by disc porosity and surface
roughness. Areas that are mainly
affected by the change in the
braking surface are an increase in
pad wear, decreased NVH, and a
decrease in disc performance.
If the level of oxidisation
experienced is very high, the disc
3. Disc surface (1) – Immediately after bedding –

Do not renew.
4. Disc surface (1) – 200 km racing on track – Do
not renew.
25
3. Disc surface (1) – Immediately after bedding –

Do not renew.
not renew.

not renew.
26
not renew.
6. Disc surface (1) – 1000 km hard racing on

track – Check disc weight.
27
6. Disc surface (1) – 1000 km hard racing on
track – Check disc weight.
7. Disc surface (1) – 1500-2000 km racing on

track – Renew disc (end of disc life).
28
7. Disc surface (1) – 1500-2000 km racing on
track – Renew disc (end of disc life).
Care Tool used when assessing damage must be a precision gauge with a tolerance of 0.1mm.
Point:
Care If disc is damaged outside of specified figures along the edge of the braking surface, disc must be renewed.
Point:
Care Any damage on the edge of the braking surface will not affect the disc weight due to the material density.
Point:
Checking CCM disc – Damage control specifications
29
1. If the CCM disc becomes damaged whilst
handling due to being dropped or knocked,
please use the following guidelines.
Width (E) Maximum allowed 4 mm
Depth (D) Maximum allowed 3 mm
Length (F) Maximum allowed 20 mm
Chips Maximum allowed 3 per disc
Projected Maximum area allowed 40
area mm
Care See below examples of damage

Point: that may occur to a CCM disc (1),
and the relevant action you should
employ.
2. Disc Edge – Chip on used disc – Renew disc

(1).
30
Care See below examples of damage
Point: that may occur to a CCM disc (1),
and the relevant action you should
employ.
2. Disc Edge – Chip on used disc – Renew disc

(1).
3. Disc Cross Drilled Hole – Chip on used disc –

Renew disc (1).
31
3. Disc Cross Drilled Hole – Chip on used disc –
Renew disc (1).
4. Disc Edge – Chip on disc – Do not renew disc

(1).
32
4. Disc Edge – Chip on disc – Do not renew disc
(1).
5. Disc Cross Drilled Hole – Chip on disc – Do

not renew disc (1).
33
5. Disc Cross Drilled Hole – Chip on disc – Do
not renew disc (1).
34
Care If disc minimum weight is reached, renew discs as an axle set.
Point: If disc reaches its maximum mileage, there will be no loss in performance but an increased risk of permanently damaging
the disc.
At every service or replacement of pad, please make a note in the service manual of the disc weight (measured and
residual) and mileage of the vehicle. From this information an estimation of disc life can be created.
Residual disc weight is calculated by subtracting the minimum disc weight from the measured disc weight.
Estimated disc life calculations are only suitable if the same type of usage has occurred between measurements.
If estimated disc life is very close to the mileage vehicle is currently on, recommendation is to change discs.
Disc thickness must always be measured from the base of the outer edge. Maximum wear limit for a CCM disc is the
original disc thickness minus 0.5mm. If the difference is greater than 0.5 mm, renew disc.
The thickness change in a CCM disc does not provide a conclusive level of wear experienced. To get this information the
disc must be weighed.
Before weighing the disc, it must be thoroughly cleaned including all cross drilled holes.
The disc must be dry and free of moisture, due to the porous nature of the CCM material.
Suitable and calibrated weighing scales must be used when carrying out this procedure.
Due to the fibres in the CCM disc oxidizing when subjected to extreme thermal pressure, the mass of the disc will be
reduced. Because of this the CCM brakes must be weighed annually, every 15000 km, and before and after track use to
ensure that they are still suitable for use.
Checking carbon ceramic brake disc (CCM)– Weight

Care When weighing discs, ensure that
Point: the scales used have an accuracy
range of +/- 2.5 grams.
1. Put disc on scales.
2. Register measured disc weight.
Care If measured weight is within 20g,

Point: equal to, or less than the marked
minimum weight, the disc must be
renewed. Please ensure that discs
are renewed in axle sets.
3. Check measured weight against marked

minimum weight on disc bell (G).
4. To measure the estimated disc life using data
recorded for mileage and residual disc weight,
please use the following formula:
1st Service mileage (ODO1) Residual
= 15000km weight (R1) = 35
118g
range of +/- 2.5 grams.
1. Put disc on scales.
2. Register measured disc weight.
Care If measured weight is within 20g,

Point: equal to, or less than the marked
minimum weight, the disc must be
renewed. Please ensure that discs
are renewed in axle sets.
3. Check measured weight against marked

minimum weight on disc bell (G).
4. To measure the estimated disc life using data
recorded for mileage and residual disc weight,
please use the following formula:
1st Service mileage (ODO1) Residual
= 15000km weight (R1) =
118g
2nd Service mileage Residual
(ODO2) = 25000km weight (R2) =
67g
Wear estimate (WE) = (R2 –
R1) / (ODO2 – ODO1)
WE = (67 – 118) / (25000 –
15000)
WE = -51 / 10000
WE = -0.0051
Estimated disc life (EDL) =
ODO2 – (R2 / WE)
EDL = 25000 – (67 /
-0.0051)
EDL = 25000 – (-13137)
EDL = 38137km
36
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-001 - Remove/install brake pads - Front
Preparation work
1. AA-RM-02A04-04-007 Secure/lift vehicle on lifting platform.
2. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/install wheels.
Remove brake pads - Front
37
WARNING!
Risk of poisoning and injury when
handling brake fluid!
Swallowing brake fluid can cause symptoms
of poisoning such as headaches, dizziness,
stomach pains, vomiting, diarrhoea, cramps
and unconsciousness.
A dose of more than 100 cm3 can have fatal
consequences.
Contact with brake fluid can cause serious
skin damage to unprotected skin.
Wear safety glasses and protective clothing
such as rubber gloves.
• Ensure that brake fluid is only accessible
to authorized personnel.
• Store brake fluid in original containers
only.
• Only store brake fluid in suitable,
appropriately marked containers.
• Never put brake fluid in beverage
containers.
1. Release brake fluid reservoir cap.
2. Disconnect brake pad wear indicator electrical

connector.
3. Remove brake pad securing pins (1).
4. Remove bolt (2) and anti rattle clip. M10 x 38

35 Nm
Care Use suitable grip.
Point: Protect caliper from damage.
5. Push caliper pistons back.
6. Remove brake pads (3).
38
containers.

connector.
3. Remove brake pad securing pins (1).
4. Remove bolt (2) and anti rattle clip. M10 x 38

35 Nm
Install brake pads - Front
WARNING!
Risk of accident due to lack of braking effect!
When the brakes are used for the first time after any work was performed on the braking system’s hydraulics area, the
risk of an accident is increased due to an impaired braking effect.
Press the brake pedal several times to build up pressure in the brake system after finishing work on the braking
system’s hydraulics area and before starting the vehicle.
• Hold the brake pedal in a pressed down position for approximately 30 s once pressure has been built up in the brake
system, the pressure in the brake system must not drop during this time.
Care Ensure brake components are clean and free from dirt and debris.
Point: Observe direction arrow on anti rattle clip.
Care Ensure that the pad wear sensor and brake hose are secured with P-clips positioned perpendicular to the
Point: brake disc.
Care If iron brakes are fitted to vehicle, proceed to step 2.

39
Point:
Point: brake disc.

Point:
1. If carbon ceramic brakes are fitted to vehicle, before re-installing brake pads the brake discs must be weighed and
checked. AA-RM-03C01-01-006 - Cleaning/ Checking carbon ceramic brake disc (CCM)/Iron brake disc (Fe)
3. Apply the footbrake several times to ensure the brake pads are correctly seated.
WARNING!
Risk of poisoning and injury when handling brake fluid!
Swallowing brake fluid can cause symptoms of poisoning such as headaches, dizziness, stomach pains, vomiting,
diarrhoea, cramps and unconsciousness.
A dose of more than 100 cm3 can have fatal consequences.
Contact with brake fluid can cause serious skin damage to unprotected skin.
Wear safety glasses and protective clothing such as rubber gloves.
• Ensure that brake fluid is only accessible to authorized personnel.
• Store brake fluid in original containers only.
• Only store brake fluid in suitable, appropriately marked containers.
• Never put brake fluid in beverage containers.
4. Check brake fluid level and refill, if necessary. AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
5. If new brake pads/discs have been fitted, bed in the brakes. AA-RM-03C01-01-004 - Bedding new brake pads/discs
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-001 - Remove/install brake pads - Front
Bolt Securing bolt brake pads/antirattle clip - Front M10 x 38 35 Nm
40
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-002 - Remove/install brake caliper - Front
Preparation work
Remove brake caliper - Front
WARNING!
consequences.
only.
containers.
Care Ensure brake fluid connections are

Point: clean and free from dirt and debris
to avoid contamination.
Care Collect the brake fluid that

Point: emerges in a suitable container. 41
Care Close off the brake line with a

containers.


Point: emerges in a suitable container.

Point: suitable plug.
1. Remove bolt (1). M5 x 12 5 Nm
Care Replace Copper washers.

Point:
2. Remove banjo bolt (2). M10 42 Nm
4. Remove caliper (4).
Detach brake caliper - Front
42
Care Do not let caliper hang on brake

Point: hose.
2. Detach caliper (4) and hang in suitable

location with cable tie.
Install brake caliper - Front
43
WARNING!
Care Replace O-Ring seals and copper washers.

Point:
Point:
Care Always renew bolts.

Point:
Point: brake disc.
Care Where fitted, clean and apply loctite to disc cooling duct bolt. Loctite 243
Point:
2. Bleed brake system if necessary. AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-002 - Remove/install brake caliper - Front
Bolt cooling duct - brake caliper M5 x 12 5 Nm
Banjo bolt Brake hose - Caliper M10 42 Nm
Bolt Caliper M12 x 85 93 Nm
44
Bolt cooling duct - brake caliper M5 x 12 5 Nm
45
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-003 - Remove/Install brake disc - Front
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-03C01-01-002 Remove/install brake caliper - Front
Remove brake disc - Front

2. Remove brake disc (2).
Install brake disc - Front
46
Care Ensure all brake components are clean and free from dirt and debris.
Point: When fitting new brake discs ensure a new brake pad axle set is fitted.
1. Install in reverse order.
WARNING!
WARNING!
47
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-003 - Remove/Install brake disc - Front
Bolt Brake disc - Hub M6 x 15 10 Nm
48
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Front Pipes / AA-RM-03C01-02-001 Remove/Install brake hose - Front
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/Install wheels
WARNING!
Swallowing brake fluid can cause symptoms of poisoning such as headaches, dizziness, stomach pains, vomiting, diarrhoea,
cramps and unconsciousness.
Remove brake hose - Front
49
Care Use a suitable container to catch
Point: the excess fluid.
Care Close off the caliper with a suitable

Point: plug.
1. Remove banjo bolt (1) and Copper washer.

M10 42 Nm
2. Detach union nut (2). M10 17 Nm
50
3. Loosen nut (3).
4. Remove front brake hose (4).
51
3. Loosen nut (3).
4. Remove front brake hose (4).
Install brake hose - Front

Care Clean area around union.
Point:

Point:
2. Bleed braking system. AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Front Pipes / AA-RM-03C01-02-001 Remove/Install brake hose - Front
52
Banjo bolt Brake hose - Calliper M10 42 Nm
Union nut Brake pipe - Brake hose M10 17 Nm
53
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Rear / AA-RM-03C01-03-003 - Remove/install brake pads - Rear
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/Install wheels.
Remove brake pads - Rear
54
WARNING!
consequences.
only.
containers.

connector.
3. Remove brake pad securing pins (1) and anti
rattle clip (2).
55
containers.

connector.
3. Remove brake pad securing pins (1) and anti
rattle clip (2).
Install brake pads - Rear
WARNING!

Point:
1. If carbon ceramic brakes are fitted to vehicle, before re-installing

56 brake pads the brake discs must be weighed and

Point:
1. If carbon ceramic brakes are fitted to vehicle, before re-installing brake pads the brake discs must be weighed and
WARNING!
57
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Rear / AA-RM-03C01-03-001 - Remove/install brake caliper - Rear
Preparation work
Remove brake caliper - Rear
WARNING!
consequences.
only.
containers.


Point: emerges in a suitable container. 58

containers.


Point: emerges in a suitable container.

Point: suitable plug.

Point:
1. Remove banjo bolt (1). M10 42 Nm
2. Remove bolts (2).

Carbon Ceramic (CCM): M12 x 85 93 Nm
Iron (Fe): M12 x 66 70 Nm
3. Remove caliper (3).
Detach brake caliper - Rear
59
Care Do not let caliper hang on brake

Point: hose.
Care Ensure the caliper in a suitable

Point: position with cable ties.
2. Detach caliper and hang in suitable location

with cable tie (3).
Install brake caliper - Rear
60
WARNING!
Care Replace O-Ring seals and copper washers.

Point:
Point:
Care Always renew bolts.

Point:
2. Bleed brake system if necessary. AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Rear / AA-RM-03C01-03-001 - Remove/install brake caliper - Rear
Bolt Caliper (Carbon Ceramic Version) M12 x 85 93 Nm
Bolt Caliper (Iron Version) M12 x 66 70 Nm
61
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Rear / AA-RM-03C01-03-002 - Remove/install brake disc - Rear
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-03C02-01-002 Remove/install caliper parking brake
Remove brake disc - Rear

Care The Electronic parking brake in
Point: inoperative when this sequence is
carried out.
Care Before mechanical work on

Point: Parking Brake components you
must set calipers in fully open
position.
1. Connect McLaren Diagnostic System, proceed

to Diagnostic Toolbox within Electronic
parking brake (EPB).
2. Access Sequences section.
3. Carry out EPB Caliper Open.
62
3. Carry out EPB Caliper Open.
Install brake disc - Rear

Care Ensure all brake components are clean and free from dirt and debris.
Point: When fitting new brake discs ensure a new brake pad axle set is fitted.
WARNING!
• Store brake fluid in original containers only. 63
WARNING!
WARNING!
Risk of injury from moving parts!
When working on components which can be moved either by hand, by means of electric motors, or hydraulically/
pneumatically via linkage, serious injuries can occur to body parts being trapped, crushed or severed.
Monitor hazard area.
• Secure area against unauthorised access when parts are in motion.
• Never touch the mechanism of a component while it is being actuated.
• Choose a test cable of sufficient length.
Care After mechanical work on Parking Brake components you must set calipers in fully closed position.
Point:
Care The Parking Brake will be applied ensure it is safe to proceed with this sequence.
Point:
5. Connect McLaren Diagnostic System, proceed to Diagnostic Toolbox within Electronic parking brake (EPB).
64
•
Point:
Point:
7. Carry out EBP caliper Closed.
8. Carry out EBP Assembly Check.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Rear / AA-RM-03C01-03-002 - Remove/install brake disc - Rear
Bolt Brake disc - Hub M6 x 15 10 Nm
65
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Rear Pipes / AA-RM-03C01-04-001 Remove/install brake hose - Rear
Preparation work
WARNING!
Remove brake hose - Rear
66
Care Close off the caliper with a suitable

Point: plug.
1. Remove banjo bolt (1) and copper washer.

M10 42 Nm
67
3. Loosen nut (3).
4. Remove rear brake hose (4).
68
3. Loosen nut (3).
4. Remove rear brake hose (4).
Install brake hose - Rear

Care Clean area around union.
Point:
Care Replace copper washer.

Point:
2. Bleed braking system. AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Rear Pipes / AA-RM-03C01-04-001 Remove/install brake hose - Rear
69
Banjo bolt Brake hose - Calliper M10 42 Nm
Union nut Brake pipe - Brake hose M10 17 Nm
70
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C02 Parking Brake System / Parking Brake System / AA-RM-03C02-01-001 - Remove/install pads - Electronic parking brake
Preparation work
Remove pads - Electronic parking brake

Care The electronic parking brake is
carried out.

must set callipers in fully open
position.

3. Carry out EPB Calliper Open.
4. Remove pin securing clips (1).
5. Remove pad pins (2) and anti rattle clip (3).
6. Remove electronic parking brake pads.
71
4. Remove pin securing clips (1).
5. Remove pad pins (2) and anti rattle clip (3).
6. Remove electronic parking brake pads.
Install pads - Electronic parking brake
72
1. Clean all contact areas.
WARNING!
Care After mechanical work on Parking Brake components you must set callipers in fully closed position.
Point:
Point:
5. Carry out EPB Calliper Closed.
6. Carry out EPB Assembly Check.
73
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C02 Parking Brake System / Parking Brake System / AA-RM-03C02-01-003 - Remove/install electronic parking brake actuator
Preparation work
Remove electronic parking brake actuator

carried out.

must set callipers in fully open
position.

4. Disconnect electronic parking brake actuator

electrical connector (1).
6. Remove electronic parking brake actuator (3).
74

6. Remove electronic parking brake actuator (3).
Install electronic parking brake actuator
75
Care Conduct a pull test to ensure electronic parking brake actuator electrical connector is correctly fitted.
Point:
WARNING!
Care After mechanical work on Parking Brake components you must set callipers in fully closed position.
Point:
Point:
4. Carry out EPB Calliper Closed.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C02 Parking Brake System / Parking Brake System / AA-RM-03C02-01-003 - Remove/install electronic parking brake actuator
Bolt Electronic park brake actuator - caliper M6 x 12 11 Nm
76
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C02 Parking Brake System / Parking Brake System / AA-RM-03C02-01-002 - Remove/install caliper - Electronic parking brake
Preparation work
WARNING!
When working on components which can be moved either by hand, by means of electric motors, or hydraulically/pneumatically via
linkage, serious injuries can occur to body parts being trapped, crushed or severed.
Remove caliper - Electronic parking brake
77
carried out.

must set calipers in fully open
position.

3. Carry out EPB caliper Open.
Care Clean electrical connector before

Point: disconnection.
Do not use any hand tools to
disconnect electrical connector.

6. Remove electronic parking brake caliper (1).
78
Install caliper - Electronic parking brake
Care Ensure audible ‘click’ can be heard on connector installation.
Point: Conduct a pull test to ensure electronic parking brake actuator electrical connector is correctly fitted.
Care Clean and apply Loctite 2701 to 25mm of the caliper bolts, starting from end of the thread.
Point:
Point:
Point:
4. Carry out EPB caliper Closed.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C02 Parking Brake System / Parking Brake System / AA-RM-03C02-01-002 - Remove/install caliper - Electronic parking brake
Bolt Electronic park brake caliper - upright M10 x 85 33 Nm
79
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
Preparation work
WARNING!
When the brakes are used for the first time after any work was performed on the braking system’s hydraulics area, the risk of an
accident is increased due to an impaired braking effect.
Press the brake pedal several times to build up pressure in the brake system after finishing work on the braking system’s hydraulics
area and before starting the vehicle.
• Hold the brake pedal in a pressed down position for approximately 30 s once pressure has been built up in the brake system, the
pressure in the brake system must not drop during this time.
WARNING!
Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
80
Care The brake bleeding procedure is
Point: carried out using the MDS. The
below steps reference the
procedure stored on the MDS tool.
1 Connect MDS to vehicle.

.!
2 Open brake reservoir cap (1).
.!
Care Tool must deliver 2.2 bar pressure

Point: (2) and have a minimum of 2 Litres
of brake fluid to carry out
procedure correctly.
3 Connect pressure bleeding tool.

.!
81
Care Tool must deliver 2.2 bar pressure
Point: (2) and have a minimum of 2 Litres
of brake fluid to carry out
procedure correctly.
3 Connect pressure bleeding tool.

.!
Care Pump the brake pedal during each

Point: phase of the brake bleeding
procedure.
Care Pedal pump frequency = 3

Point: seconds applied to 0.5 seconds
released.
4 Fit bleed bottle to rear left calliper and open

.!both inner and outer bleed screws (3, 4). M10
17 Nm
5 Pump pedal until no air is present.
.!
6 Close bleed screws on rear left calliper (3, 4).
.!
82
Care Pump the brake pedal during each
Point: phase of the brake bleeding
procedure.

released.
4 Fit bleed bottle to rear left calliper and open

.!both inner and outer bleed screws (3, 4). M10
17 Nm
.!
6 Close bleed screws on rear left calliper (3, 4).
.!

released.
7 Fit bleed bottle to front left calliper and open

.!both inner and outer bleed screws (5, 6).
.!
9 Close bleed screws on front left calliper (5, 6).
.!
83
released.
7 Fit bleed bottle to front left calliper and open

.!both inner and outer bleed screws (5, 6).
.!
9 Close bleed screws on front left calliper (5, 6).
.!

released.
10 Fit bleed bottle to front right calliper and open

. both inner and outer bleed screws (7, 8).
.
12 Close bleed screws on front right calliper (7,
. 8).
84
released.
10 Fit bleed bottle to front right calliper and open

.
12 Close bleed screws on front right calliper (7,
. 8).

released.
13 Fit bleed bottle to rear right calliper and open

.
15 Close bleed screws on rear right calliper (9,
. 10).
Care If process needs to be repeated
Point: allow the system to rest for a
minimum of 5 minutes to prevent
damage being caused to the
braking system.
16 Disconnect pressure bleeding tool.

.
17 Check brake fluid level and fill to the correct
. level. Pentosin 5.1 or Mobil 1.5.1 85
released.
13 Fit bleed bottle to rear right calliper and open

.
15 Close bleed screws on rear right calliper (9,
. 10).
Care If process needs to be repeated
Point: allow the system to rest for a
minimum of 5 minutes to prevent
damage being caused to the
braking system.

.
. level. Pentosin 5.1 or Mobil 1.5.1
18 Close brake fluid reservoir cap (1).

.
19 Check functionality.
.
86
.
. level. Pentosin 5.1 or Mobil 1.5.1
18 Close brake fluid reservoir cap (1).

.
19 Check functionality.
.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
Bleed Screw M10 17 Nm
87
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / C01 Brake System / Brake Discs Calipers Front / AA-RM-03C01-01-004 - Bedding new brake pads/discs
CAUTION!
New brake pads & discs.
If you do not ‘bed-in’ new brake pads &/or discs, the performance of the brakes can be decreased.
Follow the sequence of the procedure.
Care New pads and discs must be bedded in, if not pad/ disc performance will be decreased.
Point:
Care The brakes should be cold (Less than 40° C) before carrying out this procedure & if possible, only use light brake
Point: applications, whilst driving to the location
Bedding new brake pads/discs - carbon ceramic material (CCM)
88
1. Slow the vehicle sixteen times from 80 km/h (50 mph) to 30 km/h (19 mph) at 0.3g. The Max starting disc temperature
should be 40˚C, whilst the Max disc temperature reached should be 300˚C at the end of the sixteenth stop. The cycle
time is around 10 seconds (between brake applications).
2. Drive 3 km (2 miles) to allow the brakes to cool.
3. Slow the vehicle sixteen times from 120 km/h (75 mph) to 30 km/h (19 mph) at 0.5g. The Max starting disc temperature
should be 40˚C, whilst the Max disc temperature reached should be 400˚C at the end of the sixteenth stop. The cycle
time is around 15 seconds (between brake applications).
5. Slow the vehicle ten times from 130 km/h (81 mph) to 30 km/h (19 mph) at 0.7g. The Max starting disc temperature
should be 40˚C, whilst the Max disc temperature reached should be 700˚C at the end of the tenth stop. The cycle time is
around 20 seconds (between brake applications).
6. Drive 4 km (2.5 miles) to allow the brakes to cool.
7. Use Full ABS (max pedal effort) and slow the vehicle three times from 100 km/h (62 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph). The Max
starting disc temperature should be 40°C. Increase the speed normally after you have slowed down.
Care The cool-down periods are the minimum needed and can be longer.
Point:
9. After bedding, visually inspect discs to ensure there is a good/consistent coating of pad material on the disc surface
(transfer surface) and no surface defects.
CAUTION!
New brake pads & discs.
If you do not ‘bed-in’ new brake pads &/or discs, the performance of the brakes can be decreased.
Follow the sequence of the procedure.
Care `Max deceleration`should be the maximum decelaration without triggering ABS. ABS should never be triggered while
Point: bleeding brakes for iron discs and pads.
Bedding new brake pads/discs - Iron (Fe)
89
1 Slow the vehicle from 48 km/h (30 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph) at 0.3g 6 times. Allow 60 seconds (1 minute) between each
.!application.
2 Slow the vehicle six times from 100 km/h (62 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph) at 0.5g. Allow 60 seconds (1 minute) between each
.!application.
3 Drive 3 km (2 miles) to allow the brakes to cool.
.!
4 Slow the vehicle five times from 100 km/h (62 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph) at 0.7g. Allow 120 seconds (2 minutes) between
.!each application.
5 Slow the vehicle five times from 100 km/h (62 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph) at 0.7g. Allow 60 seconds (1 minute) between
.!each application.
6 Slow the vehicle five times from 100 km/h (62 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph) at 0.7g. Allow 30 seconds between each
.!application.
7 Drive 4 km (2.5 miles) to allow the brakes to cool.
.!
8 Slow the vehicle five times from 100 km/h (62 mph) to 0 km/h (0 mph) at 0.7g. Accelerate the vehicle as quickly as
.!possible between stops and allow no pause between applications.
9 Drive 8 km (5 miles) to allow the brakes to cool.
.!
10 After bedding, visually inspect discs to ensure there is a good/consistent coating of pad material on the disc surface
. (transfer layer) and no surface defects.
90
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-001 - Remove/install floor panel - Engine/fuel tank
Preparation work
Remove floor panel - Engine/fuel tank

Care Two technicians required.
Point:
1. Remove bolts (1) and washers. M6 x 20 10

Nm
4. Remove engine/fuel tank floor panel (4).
91
4. Remove engine/fuel tank floor panel (4).
Install floor panel - Engine/fuel tank

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-001 - Remove/install floor panel - Engine/fuel tank
Bolt Floor panel engine/fuel tank M6 x 20 10 Nm
92
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-002 - Remove/install floor panel - Front - Up to MY14
Preparation work
Remove floor panel - Front - Up to MY14

2. Remove bolts (2). M6 x 20 6 Nm .
3. Remove tyre spoiler (3).
5. Detach floor panel (4).
93
5. Detach floor panel (4).
Care With the aid of another technican

Point: support the floor panel.
7. Remove floor panel.
94
Care With the aid of another technican
Point: support the floor panel.
7. Remove floor panel.
Install floor panel - Front - Up to MY14

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-002 - Remove/install floor panel - Front - Up to MY14
Bolt tyre spoiler - front panel M6 x 20 2 Nm
Bolt Floor panel M6 x 20 6 Nm
Bolt Front floor panel M6 x 20 4 Nm
Bolt Front floor panel M6 x 20 4 Nm
95
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-003 - Remove/install floor panel - Tunnel
Preparation work
Remove floor panel - Tunnel

1. Remove bolts M6 x 16 (2). M6 x 16 10 Nm
2. Remove tunnel floor panel (1).
Install floor panel - Tunnel

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-003 - Remove/install floor panel - Tunnel
96
Bolt Floor panel tunnel M6 x 16 10 Nm
97
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-005 - Remove/install floor panel - Rear lower extension
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-001 Remove/install wheel arch liner - Rear
4. AA-RM-02A04-04-001 Remove/install floor panel - Engine/fuel tank
Care Ensure that the fuel filler drain hose does not become detached from the fuel filler bowl whilst carrying out this procedure.
Point:
Care The fuel filler drain hose will only be attached to the left hand floor panel - rear lower extension.
Point:
Care Only carry out steps 1 and 2 if you are replacing both or the left hand only floor panel - rear lower extension.
Point:
Remove floor panel - Rear lower extension

1. Remove jubilee clip
2. Detach hose
3. Remove bolt (1). M? 5 Nm
98
1. Remove jubilee clip
2. Detach hose
3. Remove bolt (1). M? 5 Nm
5. Remove bolts (3). 4.2 x 16 2 Nm
6. Remove floor panel - Rear lower extension

(4).
99
5. Remove bolts (3). 4.2 x 16 2 Nm
6. Remove floor panel - Rear lower extension

(4).
Care Please ensure that the fuel filler drain hose is fitted securely to the fuel filler bowl, and also the left hand floor panel - rear
Point: lower extension before installing all pre work components.
Install floor panel - Rear lower extension

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-005 - Remove/install floor panel - Rear lower extension
Bolt Rear lower extension - Wheel arch liner M? 5 Nm
Screw tyre spoiler - front panel 4.2 x 16 2 Nm
100
Bolt Rear lower extension - Wheel arch liner M? 5 Nm
101
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-006 - Remove/install tyre spoilers, front guide vanes, rear guide vanes
Preparation work
Remove tyre spoilers - Up to MY14

1. Remove screw (1).
3. Remove screws (3). 4.2 x 16 2 Nm
4. Remove tyre spoiler (4).
Remove tyre spoilers - From MY15 onwards
102
2. Remove tyre spoilers (2).
Remove front guide vanes
103
1. Remove screws (1). M6 x 16 6 Nm
2. Remove front guide vanes (2).
Remove rear guide vanes
104
1. Remove bolts (1). M6 x 16 2.5 Nm
2. Remove guide vanes (2).
Install tyre spoilers, front guide vanes, rear guide vanes

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-006 - Remove/install tyre spoilers, front guide vanes, rear guide vanes
Bolt - Wheel arch liner/Floor - tyre spoiler (MY15) M6 x 20 4 Nm
Screw front guide vane - tub M6 x 16 6 Nm
Bolt Guide vane - Diffuser M6 x 16 2.5 Nm
105
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-008 - Remove/install floor panel - Transmission
Preparation work
Remove floor panel - Transmission

2. Partially remove transmission floor panel (1).
3. Disconnect electrical connector (3).
4. Remove transmission floor panel.
106
3. Disconnect electrical connector (3).
4. Remove transmission floor panel.
Install floor panel - Transmission

1. Install components in reverse order
Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-008 - Remove/install floor panel - Transmission
Bolt Floor panel transmission M6 x 20 10 Nm
107
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-003 - Remove/install upper wishbone - Front
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-002 Remove/install wheel arch liner - Front
4. AA-RM-03C01-01-002 Remove/install brake - Caliper - Front.
5. AA-RM-02A02-03-005 Remove/install ducts - Brake disc cooling - Front.
6. AA-RM-03C01-01-003 Remove/install brake - Disc - Front.
7. AA-RM-05M02-01-006 Remove/install wheel speed sensor - Front
8. AA-RM-03B01-02-004 Remove/install upright - Front
Remove upper wishbone - Front
108
Care Ensure correct torque value is
Point: applied to the correct bolt size. M8
( M8 x 30 33 Nm ), M10 ( M10 x
30 63 Nm ).
Bolt size dependant on build date.
1. Remove bolts (1). M8 x 30 33 Nm M10 x 30

63 Nm
2. Remove wishbone (2).
Install upper wishbone - Front

2. Check chassis geometry. AA-RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel alignment check

Point:
3. Apply pressure to top of wheel towards vehicle. If excessive inward movement of wheel is present, the upper ball joint has
failed. The wishbone will require replacing.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-003 - Remove/install upper wishbone - Front
Bolt Wishbone - Subframe - M8 M8 x 30 33 Nm
Bolt Wishbone - Subframe - M8 109M8 x 30 33 Nm
110
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-002 - Remove/install lower wishbone - Front
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-002 Remove/install wheel arch liner - Front
8. AA-RM-03B01-02-004 Remove/install upright - Front
Remove lower wishbone - Front
111
Care Use the pre set special tool to

Point: achieve full access to the bolts,
and to achieve the correct torque
value.

( M8 x 30 33 Nm ), M10 ( M10 x
30 63 Nm ).

63 Nm
4. Remove wishbone (4).
Install lower wishbone - Front
112
Care Carry out steps 2 to 4, if a front lower wishbone is refitted or a new one is fitted.
Point:
2. Connect McLaren Diagnostic System, proceed to Diagnostic Toolbox within Power Chassis Control Unit (PCCU).
4. Carry out Damping Sensor Calibration.
5. Check chassis geometry. AA-RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel alignment check

Point:
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-002 - Remove/install lower wishbone - Front
Bolt Bracket sensor suspension displacement - Lower wishbone M5 x 10 5 Nm
Bolt/nut Lower wishbone - Actuator M10 x 85 60 Nm
113
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-001 - Remove/install upper wishbone - Rear
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-001 Remove/install wheel arch liner - rear
5. AA-RM-02A02-03-007 Remove/Install cooling duct
Remove upper wishbone - Rear
114
Care Convex washers on left hand side
Point: only. Plain washer on right hand
side.
Care Observe excentric stepped

Point: washer.
Care Use ball joint splitter to separate.

Point:
2. Remove nut (2). M14 100 Nm

value.

( M8 x 25 33 Nm ), M10 ( M10 x
30 63 Nm ).

63 Nm
4. Remove upper wishbone (4).
115
value.

( M8 x 25 33 Nm ), M10 ( M10 x
30 63 Nm ).

63 Nm
4. Remove upper wishbone (4).
Install upper wishbone - Rear

2. Check chassis geometry AA-RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel alignment check .

Point:
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-001 - Remove/install upper wishbone - Rear
Bolt Drop link M14 x 60 100 Nm
Nut Upper wishbone - Upright M14 100 Nm
Bolt Wishbone - Subframe - M8 116M8 x 25 33 Nm
Nut Upper wishbone - Upright M14 100 Nm
117
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-002 - Remove/install lower wishbone - Rear
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-001 Remove/install wheel arch liner - rear
Remove lower wishbone - Rear

1. Cut cable ties (1).
2. Remove C-clip (2).
4. Detach bolt (4). M10 x 70 60 Nm
118
4. Detach bolt (4). M10 x 70 60 Nm

value.

( M8 x 25 33 Nm ), M10 ( M10 x
30 63 Nm ).

33 Nm
6. Remove bolt (4).
7. Remove lower wishbone (6).
119
value.

( M8 x 25 33 Nm ), M10 ( M10 x
30 63 Nm ).

33 Nm
6. Remove bolt (4).
7. Remove lower wishbone (6).
Install lower wishbone - Rear
120
Care Carry out steps 2 to 4, if a rear lower wishbone is refitted or a new one is fitted.
Point:
3. Connect McLaren Diagnostic System, proceed to Diagnostic Toolbox within Power Chassis Control Unit (PCCU).
5. Carry out Damping Sensor Calibration.

Point:
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-002 - Remove/install lower wishbone - Rear
Bolt Lower wishbone - Upright M14 x 110 90 Nm
Bolt Actuator bottom - Lower wishbone M10 x 70 60 Nm
121
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / D01 Steering System / Steering System / AA-RM-03D01-01-001 - Remove/install track rod
Preparation work
Remove track rod

Care Only remove battery and washer
Point: fluid reservoir if removing left hand
track rod.
1. Release lock nut (1) and wind up steering

arm.
Care Use a ball joint separator.

Point:
3. Separate track rod (3) from upright.
Care Ensure the mark is clear and will

Point: not wipe off before new track rod
is fitted.
4. Mark steering arm thread (4) with position of

track rod (m).
5. Remove track rod (3), counting the number of
full rotations it takes to remove.
122
Care Ensure the mark is clear and will
Point: not wipe off before new track rod
is fitted.
4. Mark steering arm thread (4) with position of

track rod (m).
5. Remove track rod (3), counting the number of
full rotations it takes to remove.
Care Count the number of full rotations while installing the track rod. This will align with the marking made on the steering arm
Point: thread (m).
Care Ensure track rod is held with spanner across the machined flats when applying torque to lock nut (3).
Point:
Install track rod

2. Carry out steering alignment check. AA-RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel alignment check
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / D01 Steering System / Steering System / AA-RM-03D01-01-001 - Remove/install track rod
123
Track rod - steering rack M14 30 Nm
124
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-004 - Remove/install upright - Front
Preparation work
Remove upright - Front
125
Care Use suitable ball joint separator.

Point:
2. Detach track rod ball joint (2) from upright (3).
3. Remove nut (4).

Point:
4. Detach lower wishbone ball joint (5) from

upright (3)
5. Remove nut (6).

Point: washer.

Point:
6. Remove upright (3) from upper wishbone ball

joint (7).
Install upright - Front
126
Care Use a plain M14 half nut and wind
Point: onto the upper and lower ball joint
threads. Torque these nuts (5, 6)
to M14 60 Nm . Once torque has
been achieved, remove slave nuts
and fit specified nuts (5, 6). Torque
these nuts (5, 6) to M14 100 Nm
.
Care If refitting or renewing camber

Point: tophat in upright, ensure Loctite
222 is used on the position fixing
and a torque value of 1.2 Nm is
applied.
2. Check chassis geometry. AA-

RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel
alignment check
Point:
3. Apply pressure to top of wheel towards

vehicle. If excessive inward movement of
wheel is present, the upper ball joint has
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-004 - Remove/install upright - Front
Nut Track rod - Upright M12 70 Nm
Half Nut wishbone - Upright M14 60 Nm
Nut wishbone - Upright M14 100 Nm
127
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-001 - Remove/install wheel hub assembly - Front
Preparation work
Remove wheel hub assembly - Front
128
1. Remove bolts and washers (1). M12 x 30 70
Nm
2. Remove wheel hub (2).
Install wheel hub front

Care Renew hub nut if it has been detached.
Point: Tighten up hub nut to 320 Nm and stave it over.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B01 Front Suspension / Front Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B01-02-001 - Remove/install wheel hub assembly - Front
Bolts Hub - Upright M12 x 30 70 Nm
129
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-007 - Remove/install tie rod - Rear
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-001 Remove/install wheel arch liner - rear.
Remove tie rod - Rear

Care Use ball joint splitter to separate.
Point:
2. Pull back dust cover (2).
3. Unscrew tie rod (3) from aluminium subframe

(4). M16 x 1.5 80 Nm
4. Remove tie rod (3).
130
2. Pull back dust cover (2).
3. Unscrew tie rod (3) from aluminium subframe

(4). M16 x 1.5 80 Nm
4. Remove tie rod (3).
Install tie rod - Rear

Care Apply an initial torque of 70Nm to the tie rod. Then apply a secondary torque of 80Nm. M16 x 1.5 80 Nm
Point:
2. Perform geometry check
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-007 - Remove/install tie rod - Rear
Nut Tie rod - Upright M12 70 Nm
Bolt Tie rod - Aluminium subframe M16 x 1.5 80 Nm
Bolt Tie rod - Aluminium subframe 131M16 x 1.5 80 Nm
132
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-003 - Remove/install upright - Rear
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-03C02-01-002 Remove/install caliper parking brake.
4. AA-RM-03C01-03-001 Remove/install brake caliper - rear.
5. AA-RM-02A02-03-007 Remove/install cooling duct
6. AA-RM-03C01-03-002 Remove/install brake disc - rear.
Remove upright - Rear

1 Remove electronic park brake (EPB) caliper
.!bracket bolts.
2 Remove EPB caliper bracket.
.!
3 Remove driveshaft nut (1). M26 320 Nm
.!
133
1 Remove electronic park brake (EPB) caliper
.!bracket bolts.
2 Remove EPB caliper bracket.
.!
3 Remove driveshaft nut (1). M26 320 Nm
.!
4 Remove nut (2). M12 70 Nm

.!
Care Use ball joint separator.
Point:
5 Detach track rod from upright.

.!
6 Remove bolt (3). M14 x 110 90 Nm
.!
7 Remove nut (4).
.!
Point: washer.

Point:
8 Detach upper wishbone (5) from upright (6).

.! 134
9 Remove bolt (3).
.!
.!
Point:
5 Detach track rod from upright.

.!
6 Remove bolt (3). M14 x 110 90 Nm
.!
7 Remove nut (4).
.!
Point: washer.

Point:
8 Detach upper wishbone (5) from upright (6).

.!
9 Remove bolt (3).
.!
10 Remove upright - Rear (6).
.
Remove upright - Rear
135
Care Use a plain M14 half nut and wind
Point: onto the upper and lower ball joint
threads. Torque these nut (4) to
M14 60 Nm . Once torque has
been achieved, remove slave nuts
and fit specified nut (4). Torque
these nut (4) to M14 100 Nm
.
2. Check chassis geometry. AA-

RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel
alignment check
Point:
3. Apply pressure to top of wheel towards

vehicle. If excessive inward movement of
wheel is present, the upper ball joint has
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-003 - Remove/install upright - Rear
Nut Driveshaft M26 320 Nm
Bolt Lower wishbone - Upright M14 x 110 90 Nm
Half Nut wishbone - Upright M14 60 Nm
Nut wishbone - Upright M14 100 Nm
136
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-004 - Remove/install hub - Rear
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-03C02-01-002 Remove/install caliper parking brake.
4. AA-RM-03C01-03-001 Remove/install brake caliper - rear.
5. AA-RM-02A02-03-007 Remove/install cooling duct
6. AA-RM-05M02-01-007 Remove/install sensor - rear wheel speed
7. AA-RM-03C01-03-002 Remove/install brake disc - rear.
8. AA-RM-03B02-01-003 Remove/install upright.
CAUTION!
Risk of injury when unscrewing micro-encapsulated bolts!
There is an increased risk of injury when unscrewing micro-encapsulated bolts due to the sudden breakaway torque.
Always replace bolts with locking splines, microencapsulated bolts and self-locking nuts after they have been used once.
• Re-cut the mating thread before new micro-encapsulated bolts are screwed in, in order to remove all residue of the old bolt
locking compound.
Remove hub - Rear
137
2. Remove hub (2) from upright (3).
Install hub - Rear

Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-004 - Remove/install hub - Rear
Bolt Wheel hub - Upright M12 x 30 70 Nm
138
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-006 - Remove/install drop link
Preparation work
1. AA-RM-02A04-04-007 Secure/Lift vehicle on lifting platform.
Remove drop link

1. Detach wheel arch liner in mounting area.
Care Mark upper side of drop link.

Point: Convex washers on left hand side
only. Plain washer on right hand
side.
3. Remove drop link (2).
Install drop link
139
Care During assembly do not apply tension to Z-bar.
Point:
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Rear Suspension LH / AA-RM-03B02-01-006 - Remove/install drop link
140
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Z Bar Assembly / AA-RM-03B02-04-001 - Remove/install Z-bar
Preparation work
1. AA-RM-02A04-04-007 Secure/Lift vehicle on lifting platform.
3. AA-RM-02A04-04-001 Remove/install floor panel engine/fuel tank.
4. AA-RM-02A04-04-004 Remove/install rear diffusor.
Remove Z-bar
1. Detach wheel arch liner in mounting area on
both sides.
side.
2. Remove bolts (1) on both sides of Z-bar. M14

x 60 100 Nm
Care Observe the position of shims.

Point:
141
3.Remove bolts (2). M8 x 20 23 Nm

1. Detach wheel arch liner in mounting area on
both sides.
side.
2. Remove bolts (1) on both sides of Z-bar. M14

x 60 100 Nm

Point:
4. Remove Z-bar (3).
142
Point:
4. Remove Z-bar (3).
Install Z-bar
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / B02 Rear Suspension / Z Bar Assembly / AA-RM-03B02-04-001 - Remove/install Z-bar
Bolts Z-bar - Floor M8 x 20 23 Nm
143
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / B03 Wheels Tyres / Wheel Assembly / AA-RM-03B03-01-002 - Perform a wheel alignment check
1 Ensure the vehicle is on level ground.
.!
Care Apply the following adjustments to the ride height figures if the tank is full with driver: Front -2mm / Rear -
Point: 3mm.
Care Apply the following adjustments to the ride height figures if the tank is empty with driver: Front + 2mm / Rear
Point: + 3mm.
Care Driver weight range is between 70kg - 80kg

Point:
2 Ensure no additional weight is in the luggage compartment area.

.!
Care Ride heights are generally measured to the bottom of the flat floor on the front and rear axle lines.
Point:
Care Specified ride heights - 120mm front, 140mm rear (with driver and half tank of fuel) Tolerance: +/-2mm.
Point:
3 Ensure vehicle is at correct ride height.

.!
Care Tyre pressure: Front (19in Wheels) 2.0 Bar, Rear (20in Wheels) 2.2 Bar.
Point:
4 Ensure the vehicle wheels are pointed in the straight ahead position.
.!
5 Ensure the tyres are a matched axle set and at the correct pressures.
.!
6 Ensure the fuel tank is to specified level (36 litres).
.!
7 Ensure there are no leaks in the PAS system.
.!
Care Ensure the equipment manufacturers instructions are followed.
Point:
Care Toe Front = -0°1´ toe out (If machine uses decimal system = -0°017) (0mm on 19” wheel). Toe Rear = 0°04´
Point: 144
toe in (If machine uses decimal system = 0°067) (0.5mm on 20” wheel). Tolerance +/- 01´ per wheel.
.!
6 Ensure the fuel tank is to specified level (36 litres).
.!
7 Ensure there are no leaks in the PAS system.
.!
Care Ensure the equipment manufacturers instructions are followed.
Point:
Care Toe Front = -0°1´ toe out (If machine uses decimal system = -0°017) (0mm on 19” wheel). Toe Rear = 0°04´
Point: toe in (If machine uses decimal system = 0°067) (0.5mm on 20” wheel). Tolerance +/- 01´ per wheel.
Care Camber (at nominal ride height) Front = -1.5°, Rear = -1.0°, Tolerance +/- 0.1°.
Point:
Care Caster is not adjustable, but its nominal setting is between 4° – 5° positive.
Point:
Care Carry out camber adjustment using the camber adjustment tophat on the upright.
Point:
8 Check for signs of wear or damage to the suspension components.

.!
9 Carry out vehicle alignment.
.!
10 Connect McLaren Diagnostic System, proceed to Diagnostic Toolbox within Steering Angle Sensor (SAS).
.
11 Access Quick Test section check if update is available.
.
12 Proceed with Flashing if required.
.
13 Access Sequences section.
.
14 Carry out Fine Tune Zero Position procedure.
.
15 Read, delete error memory.
.
16. Check functionality.
145
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Luggage Cell Ducts Wheelarch Liners / AA-RM-02A02-03-001 - Remove/install wheel arch liner -
Rear
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/Install wheel.
Remove wheel arch liner - Rear

3. Partially remove wheel arch liner.
146
3. Partially remove wheel arch liner.
4. Disconnect tyre pressure monitor trigger

5. Remove wheel arch liner (5).
147
4. Disconnect tyre pressure monitor trigger
5. Remove wheel arch liner (5).
Install wheel arch liner - Rear

Care Ensure tyre pressure monitor trigger electrical connector is located correctly.
Point:
Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Luggage Cell Ducts Wheelarch Liners / AA-RM-02A02-03-001 - Remove/install wheel arch liner -
Rear
Bolt - Wheel arch liner M6 x 16 5 Nm
Bolt - Wheel arch liner M6 x 16 5 Nm
148
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / F02 Oil System Engine / Oil System Engine / AA-RM-04F02-01-011 - Drain/fill fluid - Engine oil
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-02A04-04-001 Remove/install floor panel - engine/fuel tank
Drain fluid - Engine oil

1. Remove cover (1).
Care Ensure header tank clamps do not

Point: drop into the engine bay.
2. Remove bolts with washers (2). M6 x 16 6 Nm
Care Use 10mm flexi-head ratchet

Point: spanner.
Care Spacer is fitted between bracket 149

Point: and nut. Ensure this does not fall
into the engine bay.
2. Remove bolts with washers (2). M6 x 16 6 Nm

Point: spanner.
Care Spacer is fitted between bracket

Care Ensure grommet remains in place

Point: on header tank bracket.
Care Ensure that the hoses connected

Point: to the coolant reservoir do not
become detached, put under high
tension, or become damaged
during detachment and moving of
the coolant reservoir to gain
access to oil filter cap. Protect the
area sufficiently before carrying
out this step.
4. Remove oil filter cap (4). 25 Nm
150

during detachment and moving of
the coolant reservoir to gain
access to oil filter cap. Protect the
area sufficiently before carrying
out this step.
4. Remove oil filter cap (4). 25 Nm

Care Drain oil whilst at a warm

Point: temperature.
Allow oil to drain for at least 15
minutes.
Care Oil must also be drained from the

Point: turbocharger oil return hoses. AA-
RM-04F01-01-035 - Remove/
install turbo charger oil return
hose Only disconnect the oil return
hoses from the engine
ladderframe. Renew O-ring on the
oil return hose if it has become
damaged.
5. Remove plug (5). T50 24 Nm

151
6. Remove bolt (6). M14 18 Nm
Care Drain oil whilst at a warm

Point: temperature.
Allow oil to drain for at least 15
minutes.
Care Oil must also be drained from the

Point: turbocharger oil return hoses. AA-
RM-04F01-01-035 - Remove/
install turbo charger oil return
hose Only disconnect the oil return
hoses from the engine
ladderframe. Renew O-ring on the
oil return hose if it has become
damaged.
5. Remove plug (5). T50 24 Nm
6. Remove bolt (6). M14 18 Nm
7. Drain engine oil.
8. Remove oil filter (9).
Fill fluid - Engine oil
152
Care Filter cap torque figure is
Point: embossed on the cap. 25 Nm
1 Replace both O-rings (7).

.!
2 Replace washers on tank bolt (6).
.!
3 Renew sump plug incl. washer (5).
.!
4 Install plug and bolt in reverse order.
.!
5 Install oil filter (9) and filter cap (4).
.!
6 Remove oil filler cap (8).

.!
Care Add no more than the specified
Point: quantity of oil to the tank at any
one time.
Do not choke the filler tube with
oil under any circumstances.
Care Do not put more than 6.8 litres of

Point: oil into the system. If this quantity
has been achieved with no
movement to the oil level gauge,
please give the vehicle a
complete check of the oil system
including use of the McLaren
Diagnostic System. Under no
circumstances should the above
mentioned quantity be exceeded.
7 Fill up engine oil slowly using a funnel. Mobil 153

.!1 – 0W40
8 Check oil level. AA-RM-04F02-01-007 -
6 Remove oil filler cap (8).
.!
Care Add no more than the specified
Point: quantity of oil to the tank at any
one time.
Do not choke the filler tube with
oil under any circumstances.
Care Do not put more than 6.8 litres of

Point: oil into the system. If this quantity
has been achieved with no
movement to the oil level gauge,
please give the vehicle a
complete check of the oil system
including use of the McLaren
Diagnostic System. Under no
circumstances should the above
mentioned quantity be exceeded.
7 Fill up engine oil slowly using a funnel. Mobil

.!1 – 0W40
8 Check oil level. AA-RM-04F02-01-007 -
.!Check oil level
Care Ensure oil filler cap is fitted
Point: correctly. The cap should align
parallel with the vehicle (Front to
back).
9 Install oil filler cap (8).

.!
10 Install components in reverse order.
.
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / F02 Oil System Engine / Oil System Engine / AA-RM-04F02-01-011 - Drain/fill fluid - Engine oil
Bolt Reservoir coolant - Bracket M6 x 16 6 Nm
Nut Reservoir coolant - Bracket M6 6 Nm
Oil filter cap - Engine 154 25 Nm
Plug engine oil drain - engine T50 24 Nm
Oil filter cap - Engine 25 Nm
Plug engine oil drain - engine T50 24 Nm
Bolt engine oil drain - oil tank M14 18 Nm
Oil filter cap - Engine 25 Nm
155
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Power Unit / AA-RM-04F01-01-035 - Remove/install turbo charger oil return hose
Preparation work
Remove turbo charger oil return hose
WARNING!
Risk of burning and fire when handling hot or glowing
objects!
Unprotected contact with hot or glowing objects can cause severe

burns to the skin and eyes. If glowing objects come into contact
with water, hot steam or hot splashing water this can result in
severe skin and eye burns. Severe and possibly permanent
injuries can result if hot or glowing objects come into contact with
unprotected skin or eyes. Fire can result if glowing objects come
into contact with flammable materials or substances.
Wear protective clothing, safety glasses and heat resistant gloves.
• Avoid sparks and keep objects away from flammable materials

and substances when handling glowing objects.

2. Remove paper gasket (2).
156
3.
Care When removing turbocharger oil return hose, catch oil in
Point: suitable container.
4. Remove turbocharger oil return hose (4).
Install turbocharger oil return hose
Care Clean sealing face of old gasket area.

Point: Replace oil with the exact quantity that was removed.
Replace paper gasket.
Replace o-ring seal if damaged. P80 THIX
If new hose is being fitted, this will already be fitted with an o-ring and paper gasket.

2. Check engine for leaks.
3. Check oil level. AA-RM-04F02-01-007 - Check oil level
157
Bolt Oil drain pipe - Turbo charger/ engine M6 x 16 10 Nm
Bolt Oil drain pipe - Turbo charger/ engine M6 x 16 10 Nm
158
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Air Intake System / AA-RM-04F01-02-002 - Remove/install air filter
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-001 Remove/Install wheel arch liner – Rear
Remove air filter

1. Remove bolts (1) M5 x 16 3 Nm .
2. Remove airbox access hatch (2).
3. Remove air filter (3).
159
3. Remove air filter (3).
Install air filter

Care Ensure filter and airbox are clean and free of debris.
Point:
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Air Intake System / AA-RM-04F01-02-002 - Remove/install air filter
Bolt - Airbox service panel M5 x 16 3 Nm
160
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / L01 Cooling System / Engine Radiator / AA-RM-03L01-01-005 - Drain/fill fluid - coolant
Preparation work
2. Care Point: Up to MY14

AA-RM-02A04-04-002 Remove/install floor panel - Front
3. Care Point: MY15 onwards
AA-RM-02A04-04-002 Remove/install floor panel - Front
WARNING!
Risks of injury and poisoning when working with coolant!
When the engine is warm, the cooling system is pressurized. If the cooling system is opened suddenly, there is a risk of scalding
from hot coolant which splashes out.
If coolant is swallowed, symptoms of poisoning such as headaches, dizziness, stomach pain, respiratory paralysis,
unconsciousness, vomiting and cramps can occur.
Wear protective gloves, protective clothing and eye protection.
• Allow cooling system to cool down to a coolant temperature of less than 60 °C.
• Open cap of cooling system slowly; turn a conventional coolant cap as far as the first detent and turn a screwed coolant cap
approx. 1/2 turn and release the pressure.
• Do not put coolant in beverage containers.
Care Ensure vehicle is cold before commencing work.

Point:
Drain fluid - coolant
161
1. Remove coolant reservoir cap (1).

Point: the coolant.
2. Detach clamps (2, 4).
3. Detach coolant hoses (3, 5) from water pump

and front cover.
162
Point: the coolant.
2. Detach clamps (2, 4).
3. Detach coolant hoses (3, 5) from water pump

and front cover.

Point: the coolant.
4. Remove clamp (6) right hand side and left

hand side.
5. Detach coolant hoses (7) right hand side and
left hand side from low temperature radiator.
163
Point: the coolant.
4. Remove clamp (6) right hand side and left

hand side.
5. Detach coolant hoses (7) right hand side and
left hand side from low temperature radiator.
Fill fluid - coolant
164
Care Renew Oetiker clips on coolant
Point: hoses.
Ensure Oetiker clip is positioned
just outside the positioning mark
(furthest from engine block).
1 Install all coolant hoses in reverse order.

.!
Care Maximum fill on a dry vehicle is 25

Point: litres of coolant (mix ratio of 50:50
with water).
Care Use MOBIL 1 Anti Freeze EXTRA .

Point:
Care Ensure vacuum box is in a higher

Point: position than the coolant reservoir
throughout the filling procedure.
Care Ensure all relevant Personal

Point: Protective Equipment (PPE) is
worn when carrying out this
procedure (gloves, goggles, etc).
2 Attach adaptor to coolant reservoir (8).

.!
3 Connect vacuum pump to coolant fill adaptor 165
.!(8).
4 Connect vacuum box to coolant fill adaptor
Care Maximum fill on a dry vehicle is 25
Point: litres of coolant (mix ratio of 50:50
with water).
Care Use MOBIL 1 Anti Freeze EXTRA .

Point:
Care Ensure vacuum box is in a higher

Point: position than the coolant reservoir
throughout the filling procedure.
Care Ensure all relevant Personal

Point: Protective Equipment (PPE) is
worn when carrying out this
procedure (gloves, goggles, etc).

.!
3 Connect vacuum pump to coolant fill adaptor
.!(8).
.!(9).
5 Close all valves on vacuum box (Venturi 10,
.!Top 11, Lower 12, Fill 13).
6 Attach air line to top box connection (14).
.!
7 Open top and lower valves on the vacuum
.!box (11, 12).
Care Do not exceed a vacuum of 0.5
Point: bar vacuum at this stage.
8 Gradually open Venturi valve (10) on vacuum

.!box to generate vacuum in system.
Care Vacuum should not drop once top
Point: valve (11) is closed. If the vacuum
cannot be held, please check
system for leaks.
9 Close top valve (11) and ensure system can

.!hold a vacuum. 166
10 Release vacuum by closing Venturi valve (10)
. and opening top valve (11).
.!
3 Connect vacuum pump to coolant fill adaptor
.!(8).
.!(9).
5 Close all valves on vacuum box (Venturi 10,
.!Top 11, Lower 12, Fill 13).
6 Attach air line to top box connection (14).
.!
7 Open top and lower valves on the vacuum
.!box (11, 12).
Care Do not exceed a vacuum of 0.5
Point: bar vacuum at this stage.
8 Gradually open Venturi valve (10) on vacuum

.!box to generate vacuum in system.
Care Vacuum should not drop once top
Point: valve (11) is closed. If the vacuum
cannot be held, please check
system for leaks.
9 Close top valve (11) and ensure system can

.!hold a vacuum.
10 Release vacuum by closing Venturi valve (10)
. and opening top valve (11).
11 Close lower valve (12).
.
Care Place open end of filler tube in to
Point: separate coolant filled container.
Please ensure a minimum of 10
litres of coolant (50:50 mix with
water) is in the separate container.
12 Connect filler tube (15) to fill valve (13).

.
13 Open filler valve (13).
.
Care Only fill vacuum box to half way
Point: point.
14 Gradually open Venturi valve (10) to draw

. coolant mix into vacuum box.
15 Close Venturi valve (10) and fill valve (13)
. once vacuum box is half full.
16 Remove filler tube (15).
. 167
17 Open lower valve (12).
.
.
Care Only fill vacuum box to half way
Point: point.
14 Gradually open Venturi valve (10) to draw

. coolant mix into vacuum box.
15 Close Venturi valve (10) and fill valve (13)
. once vacuum box is half full.
16 Remove filler tube (15).
.
17 Open lower valve (12).
.
Care Ensure vacuum box fill level does
Point: not exceed sight level.
Care During this stage of the procedure

Point: do not exceed 0.8 bar vacuum.
18 Gradually open Venturi valve (10) to draw air

. out of vehicle coolant system. Continue until
no bubbles can be seen in the hose
connecting the vacuum box to the coolant
reservoir, or the box becomes full.
19 Close Venturi valve (10) and allow coolant to
. be drawn into the vehicle.
20 Repeat steps 10 – 18.
.
21 Detach equipment from vehicle.
.
22 Drain all coolant from vacuum box.
.
23 Repeat steps 2 - 10.
.
Care Ensure vacuum box fill level does
Point: not exceed sight level.
Care During this stage of the procedure

Point: do not exceed 0.8 bar vacuum.
24 Repeat steps 16 – 18 using a completely

. empty vacuum box.
25 Remove equipment.
.
26 Once vehicle has been filled, carry out a short
. vehicle run up and repeat steps 2 - 24.
Care Ensure coolant reservoir is filled to
Point: the minimum level. Once the
reservoir is at the correct level, 168
add an additional 350ml of coolant
mix.
24 Repeat steps 16 – 18 using a completely
. empty vacuum box.
25 Remove equipment.
.
26 Once vehicle has been filled, carry out a short
. vehicle run up and repeat steps 2 - 24.
Care Ensure coolant reservoir is filled to
Point: the minimum level. Once the
reservoir is at the correct level,
add an additional 350ml of coolant
mix.

.
169
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-015 - Drain/fill fluid - Clutch
Preparation work
4. AA-RM-02A04-04-008 Remove/install transmission floor panel
Drain fluid - Clutch

Care Ensure the clutches are opened,
Point: no gears engaged, no torque and
operate airbrake a minimum of 2
times.
1. Run engine for 2 minute at 2000 rpm.
Care Ensure airbrake is in a retracted

Point: position.
2. Stop engine.
Care Ensure area around fill plug is

Point: cleaned with solvent before
removing fill plug (3).
3. Remove fill plug (3).
170
Care Ensure airbrake is in a retracted
Point: position.
2. Stop engine.
Care Ensure area around fill plug is

Point: cleaned with solvent before
removing fill plug (3).
3. Remove fill plug (3).

4. Remove both drain plugs (1, 2).
Care Allow approximately 5 minutes for

Point: oil to drain.
5. Let the oil drain completely.
171
4. Remove both drain plugs (1, 2).

Fill fluid - Clutch

Care Renew washer on drain plug.
Point:
1 Install drain plug (2). 50 Nm

.!
Care The following process must be followed quickly, so the clutch fluid will not drain back into clutch sump.
Point:
Care Ensure a very clean funnel and pipe are used.

Point: Fill using new clutch oil only.
2 Fill clutch fluid to fill plug (3) level. Pentosin FFL-4

.!
3 Install drain plug (1), torque to 10 Nm to avoid stress damage on threads.
.!
4 Install fill plug (3), torque to 10 Nm to avoid stress damage on threads.
.!
172
Care Ensure the clutches are opened, no gears engaged, no torque.
Point: Operate the airbrake a minimum of 2 times.
Care Ensure a very clean funnel and pipe are used.
Point: Fill using new clutch oil only.
2 Fill clutch fluid to fill plug (3) level. Pentosin FFL-4

.!
3 Install drain plug (1), torque to 10 Nm to avoid stress damage on threads.
.!
.!
Care Ensure the clutches are opened, no gears engaged, no torque.
5 Run the engine for 2 minute at a fast idle speed of 2000 rpm.
.!
Care Ensure the airbrake is retracted.
Point:
6 Stop engine.
.!
7 Remove fill plug (3).
.!
Care Use a suitable container to catch the excess fluid.
Point:
8 Remove drain plug (1).

.!
Care Approximately 1.0 litre of clutch fluid will be lost.
Point: Flow of clutch oil will not stop completely.
9 Allow clutch oil to drain for 60 seconds.

.!
Care Drain plug (1) should remain removed.
Point:
10 Immediately top-up the clutch fluid within one minute until clutch fluid starts to drain out of fill point.
.
Care Renew washer on drain plug.
Point:

.
.
Care Ensure the clutches are opened, no gears engaged.
173
13 Run the engine for 2 minutes at fast idle speed of 2000 rpm.
.
Point:

.
.
Care Ensure the clutches are opened, no gears engaged.
13 Run the engine for 2 minutes at fast idle speed of 2000 rpm.
.
14 Stop engine.
.
15 Top-up clutch fluid with 1.0 litres. Pentosin FFL-4
.
Care Renew washer on fill plug (3).
Point:
16 Install the fill plug (3), torque fully. 50 Nm

.
.
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-015 - Drain/fill fluid - Clutch
Clutch fill and drain plug 50 Nm
Plug - Clutch oil drain/fill - Fill torque 10 Nm
174
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-017 - Remove/install filter - Clutch fluid
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-04G01-01-015 Clutch oil drain and refill
Remove filter - Clutch fluid

2. Remove filter - Clutch fluid (3).
175
2. Remove filter - Clutch fluid (3).
Install filter - Clutch fluid

Care Ensure filter clutch fluid is clean and free from dirt and debris to avoid contamination.
Point:
2. Check transmission for leaks.
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-017 - Remove/install filter - Clutch fluid
Bolt Fluid cooler clutch - Transmission M6 x 16 10 Nm
176
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-004 - Remove/install floor panel - rear diffuser
Preparation work
Remove floor panel - rear diffuser

Care Two technicians required.
Point:
1. Remove caps (1).
3. Remove torx bolts (3). M6 x 16 6 Nm
177
3. Remove torx bolts (3). M6 x 16 6 Nm
5. Disconnect fog/reverse lamp electrical

connector (5).
6. Remove diffuser (6).
178
5. Disconnect fog/reverse lamp electrical
connector (5).
6. Remove diffuser (6).
Install floor panel - rear diffuser

2. Check functionality of light and camera.
Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Floors Diffuser / AA-RM-02A04-04-004 - Remove/install floor panel - rear diffuser
Bolt Diffuser - Wheel Arch Liner M6 x 16 6 Nm
Bolt (Torx) Diffuser - Frame M6 x 16 6 Nm
179
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-014 - Drain/fill fluid - Transmission oil
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-02A04-04-004 Remove/install floor panel - rear diffuser
Care Use a suitable container to catch the excess fluid.

Point:
Drain fluid - Transmission oil

1. Remove drain plug (1).

Fill fluid - Transmission oil
180
Care Renew drain plug copper washer.
Point:
1 Close drain plug (1). 50 Nm

.!
2 Remove the plug (2).

.!
Care Use a clean funnel and pipe.
Point:
3 Fill up to level plug (2) (approximately 3

.!litres). Mobil PTX 75W-90
4 Install the plug (2).
.!
Care Ensure the clutches are opened,
Point: no gears engaged, no torque.
5 Run the engine for 2 minute at idle speed.

.!
.!
Care Level needs to be topped up
Point: within a minute of the stopping
engine and removing plug (2).
181
7 Top up transmission oil until it reaches the

Point: no gears engaged, no torque.
5 Run the engine for 2 minute at idle speed.

.!
.!
Point: within a minute of the stopping
engine and removing plug (2).

.!level plug (2).
8 Install the plug (2).
.!
Care Check the temperature with MDS.
Point:
9 Run the engine until transmission oil

.!temperture reaches a minimum of 95°C.
.
Point: within a minute of reaching 95°C
and removing the plug (2).

. level plug (2).
12 Renew fill plug copper washer..
.
13 Install the plug (2). 50 Nm
.
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-014 - Drain/fill fluid - Transmission oil
Transmission fill and drain plug 50 Nm
Transmission fill and drain plug 50 Nm
182
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-016 - Remove/install filter - Transmission fluid
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-04G01-01-014 Transmission oil drain and refill
Remove filter - Transmission fluid

2. Remove filter - Transmission fluid (2).
Install filter - Transmission fluid
183
Care Ensure filter transmission fluid is clean and free from dirt and debris to avoid contamination.
Point:
2. Check transmission for leaks.
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / G01 Transmission / Transmission / AA-RM-04G01-01-016 - Remove/install filter - Transmission fluid
Bolt Filter transmission fluid - Transmission M6 x 16 10 Nm
184
Instructions
FG03 Chassis / K01 Fuel System / Fuel Tank / AA-RM-03K01-01-001 - Remove/install fuel filter
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-02A02-03-004 Remove/install luggage bin - Rear
3. AA-RM-05M01-01-001 Disconnect/connect battery ground line
7. AA-RM-02A04-04-005 Panel - Rear lower extension
8. AA-RM-03L01-01-005 Drain/fill cooling system
9. AA-RM-02A05-01-009 Draining and filling air conditioning
10. AA-RM-02A04-03-007 Remove/install bodyside lower

AA-RM-02A04-03-010 Remove/install panel - Side lower
12. Care Point: From MY15
AA-RM-02A04-03-010 Remove/install panel - Side lower - MY15
AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install radiator grille
AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install radiator grille - MY15
AA-RM-02A05-01-003 Remove/install condenser
AA-RM-02A05-01-003 Remove/install condenser - MY15
185
AA-RM-03L01-01-007 Remove/install radiator - water - rear
AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install radiator grille
AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install radiator grille - MY15
AA-RM-02A05-01-003 Remove/install condenser
AA-RM-02A05-01-003 Remove/install condenser - MY15
AA-RM-03L01-01-007 Remove/install radiator - water - rear
AA-RM-03L01-01-007 Remove/install radiator - water - rear - MY15
19. AA-RM-03K01-01-003 Drain/fill fuel tank
20. AA-RM-03K01-01-004 Remove/install fuel tank
WARNING!
Risk of explosion, poisoning and injury working with fuel!
Fuels are highly inflammable and toxic if inhaled. Fuel vapours are explosive, invisible and spread out at floor level. This vapour is
poisonous when inhaled and has an anesthetizing effect in high concentrations. Fuel can cause damage to skin. For example, skin
is degreased when it comes into contact with gasoline fuel.
Observe the national safety precautions and regulations.
• Keep fuel away from fire, open light or ignition sources.
• Ensure the work place is adequately ventilated.
• Never drain or pour in fuels over assembly pits.
• Store drained fuel in a suitable and sealed vessel.
• Immediately eliminate any fuel which has flowed out.
• Conducting work on a vehicle with open flames (e. g. welding etc.).
• Before carrying out this work, remove relevant parts of fuel system and seal open fuel lines with plugs.
Remove fuel filter
186
1 Remove nuts (1). M6 8 Nm
.!
2 Detach harness carrier (2).
.!
3 Disconnect electrical connectors (3).

.!
4 Remove harness carrier with harness.
.!
5 Remove fuel feed line tank to engine bay (4).
.!
6 Detach purge line (5).
.!
Care Filter is on left hand access cover.
Point:
7 Remove bolts (6). M6 x 16 8 Nm

.!
8 Remove retaining ring (7).
.!
187
.!
4 Remove harness carrier with harness.
.!
5 Remove fuel feed line tank to engine bay (4).
.!
6 Detach purge line (5).
.!
Care Filter is on left hand access cover.
Point:

.!
8 Remove retaining ring (7).
.!
9 Remove access cover with fuel filter (8)

.!partially.
.
11 Detach fuel line (10).
.
. completely.
188
.!partially.
.
11 Detach fuel line (10).
.
. completely.
Install fuel filter

1. Renew access cover with fuel filter.
2. Renew sealing ring.
Torque settings
FG03 Chassis / K01 Fuel System / Fuel Tank / AA-RM-03K01-01-001 - Remove/install fuel filter
Nut harness carrier - Fuel tank M6 8 Nm
Bolts with washers Access cover retaining ring M6 x 16 8 Nm
189
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A03 Closures / Doors and Mirrors / AA-RM-02A03-03-003 - Remove/install cover door shut - Rear lower
Care Risk of paint damage.
Point:
Remove cover door shut - Rear lower

1. Open door.
2. Use tape to prevent paint damage.
3. Remove (arrows) cover door shut (1) using

suitable trim tool.
Install cover door shut - Rear lower

190
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Roof Panels Fenders Fuel Filler / AA-RM-02A04-03-007 - Remove/install bodyside lower - Rear
Preparation work
4. AA-RM-02A03-03-003 Remove/install cover door shut - rear lower

Point:
Remove bodyside lower - Rear

1. Open door.
2. Use tape to prevent paint damage (arrows).
3. Prise out cover door shut (1).
191
4.Remove bolts (2). M6 x 20 8 Nm

1. Open door.
2. Use tape to prevent paint damage (arrows).
3. Prise out cover door shut (1).
192
193
194
7. Remove bodyside lower rear (arrows).
195
7. Remove bodyside lower rear (arrows).
Install bodyside lower - Rear

196
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Roof Panels Fenders Fuel Filler / AA-RM-02A04-03-010 - Remove/install panel - Side lower - Up to MY14
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-02A04-03-007 Remove/Install panel – bodyside rear lower.
Remove panel - Side lower - Up to MY14

Point:
1. Detach (arrow) cover (1).
2. Remove bolts (2). M10x20 5 Nm
3. Remove nuts (3). M6 6 Nm
4. Remove side lower panel (4).
197
2. Remove bolts (2). M10x20 5 Nm
3. Remove nuts (3). M6 6 Nm
4. Remove side lower panel (4).
Install panel - Side lower - Up to MY14

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A04 Panels Glazing Paint / Roof Panels Fenders Fuel Filler / AA-RM-02A04-03-010 - Remove/install panel - Side lower - Up to MY14
Bolt Panel - Side lower top M10x20 5 Nm
Nut Panel - Side lower lower M6 6 Nm
198
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Finishers Badges Grilles Decals / AA-RM-02A02-02-005 - Remove/install radiator grille - Up to MY14
Preparation work
3. AA-RM-02A02-03-001 Remove/Install wheel arch liner – Rear.
5. AA-RM-02A04-03-007 Remove/Install panel – bodyside rear lower.
6. AA-RM-02A04-03-010 Remove/install panel - side lower
Remove radiator grille - Up to MY14
199
Point:
1. Remove screw (1). M6 x 16 5 Nm
2. Remove button head screw (2). M6 x 16 5 Nm
3. Remove screw (3). 2 Nm
4. Remove radiator grille (4).
Install radiator grille - Up to MY14

Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A02 Exterior Trim Lighting Wipers / Finishers Badges Grilles Decals / AA-RM-02A02-02-005 - Remove/install radiator grille - Up to MY14
Screw - Grille to Bodyside M6 x 16 5 Nm
Button Head Screw - Grille to Rocker Panel M6 x 16 5 Nm
Screw Grille - Radiator Duct 2 Nm
200
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Power Unit / AA-RM-04F01-01-037 - Remove/Install engine intake sound generator
Remove engine intake sound generator
1. Remove inlet manifold cover.
2. Detach hose (1).
3. Remove clamp (2). M6 5 Nm
4. Remove engine intake sound generator.
Install engine intake sound generator

2. Check functionality
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Power Unit / AA-RM-04F01-01-037 - Remove/Install engine intake sound generator
201
Clamp - ISG to Throttle M6 5 Nm
202
Instructions
FG02 Body Systems / A03 Closures / Engine Cover / AA-RM-02A03-04-005 - Remove/install engine compartment side cover
Remove cover
Care Apply tape in the following areas
Point: (A) on point of bodyside rears, rear
deck, and engine side covers in
gas strut hinge area.
1 Apply tape (A).

.!
2 Remove cover (1).

.!
203
2 Remove cover (1).
.!

3 Remove bolts with washers (2). M6 x 16 6 Nm

.!
Point: spanner.
Care Clamp is fitted between bracket



.!
Point: to the coolant reservoir do not 204
3 Remove bolts with washers (2). M6 x 16 6 Nm

.!
Point: spanner.
Care Clamp is fitted between bracket



.!
during detachment and rotation.
Protect the area sufficiently before
carrying out this step.
5 Move coolant reservoir (4) into raised position

.!and turn 90°.
Care Use second operater to hold
Point: engine cover.
Care Remove gas strut and lower ball

Point: stud 10 Nm for side you want to
remove.

.!
.!
Care Risk of component damage.
Point: 205
8 Remove engine compartment side cover (7).

during detachment and rotation.
Protect the area sufficiently before
carrying out this step.
5 Move coolant reservoir (4) into raised position

.!and turn 90°.
Care Use second operater to hold
Point: engine cover.
Care Remove gas strut and lower ball

Point: stud 10 Nm for side you want to
remove.

.!
.!
Point:
8 Remove engine compartment side cover (7).

.!
9 Refit lower ball stud 10 Nm and gas strut.
.!
10 Repeat steps 6 - 8 for opposite side.
.
Install engine compartment side cover

Point:
Torque settings
FG02 Body Systems / A03 Closures / Engine Cover / AA-RM-02A03-04-005 - Remove/install engine compartment side cover
Ball stud - Engine Cover 10 Nm
Bolt Engine compartment side cover - Body M6 x 16 4 Nm
206
207
Instructions
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Power Unit / AA-RM-04F01-01-026 - Remove/install spark plug
Preparation work
2. AA-RM-02A03-04-005 Remove/install side cover engine compartment cover
DANGER!
Risk of death from high voltages in the ignition system!
Electronic ignition systems operate within a hazardous power range both at the low voltage side (primary circuit) as well as on the
high voltage side (secondary circuit). Contacts with such parts can result in burns, heart flutter or cardiac arrest. Persons with heart
pacemakers must not perform any work on the ignition system.
Wear safety shoes (with rubber soles).
• Switch ignition off before commencing any work on the ignition system.
• Do not touch or dismantle components of ignition system when working on running or rotating engine with cranking speed.
• Detach the crankshaft position sensor connection either at the control unit or at the position sensor.
• Do not install any electrically conducting, uninsulated adapters or installation sensors into the ignition cable.
WARNING!
Risk of burning and fire when handling hot or glowing objects!
Unprotected contact with hot or glowing objects can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes. If glowing objects come into contact
with water, hot steam or hot splashing water this can result in severe skin and eye burns. Severe and possibly permanent injuries
can result if hot or glowing objects come into contact with unprotected skin or eyes. Fire can result if glowing objects come into
contact with flammable materials or substances.
Wear protective clothing, safety glasses and heat resistant gloves.
• Avoid sparks and keep objects away from flammable materials and substances when handling glowing objects.
Care Allow hot parts to cool down first!

Point:
Remove spark plug
208
1. Detach crankcase ventilation hoses (1, A-B)
from the oil tank.
2. Move crankcase breather (2) in direction (C).
3. Note overview of cylinder sequence 1 - 8.
209
3. Note overview of cylinder sequence 1 - 8.
Care Must remove bolts (4) for ignition

Point: coils 4 and 8 before disconnect
happens.
Care To remove ignition coils (7) 4 and

Point: 8, once bolt (4) is removed turn
180° to disconnect electrical
connectors (3).
Care Remove ignition coils (7) 4 and 8

Point: first to allow better access to
disconnect ignition coils (7) 3 and
7.
4. Disconnect electrical connectors (3).
Care To remove bolt under frame for

Point: ignition coils (7) 3 and 7 access
bolts from opposite side of vehicle
210
with a magnetic socket.
Care Must remove bolts (4) for ignition
Point: coils 4 and 8 before disconnect
happens.
Care To remove ignition coils (7) 4 and

Point: 8, once bolt (4) is removed turn
180° to disconnect electrical
connectors (3).
Care Remove ignition coils (7) 4 and 8

Point: first to allow better access to
disconnect ignition coils (7) 3 and
7.
4. Disconnect electrical connectors (3).
Care To remove bolt under frame for

Point: ignition coils (7) 3 and 7 access
bolts from opposite side of vehicle
with a magnetic socket.
Care Prevent debris from falling in whilst

Point: selecting tools for spark plug
removal.
6. Remove ignition coil (5).
Care For spark plugs in position 1

Point: and 5 the following tools are
required:
bent handle flexi head 3/8" drive
ratchet with 6” locking extension
14mm spark plug socket that is
either magnetic or has an
interference fit
For all the remaining 6 spark
plugs the following tools are
required:
211
bent handle flexi head ratchet with
2” locking extension
Point: selecting tools for spark plug
removal.
6. Remove ignition coil (5).
Care For spark plugs in position 1

Point: and 5 the following tools are
required:
bent handle flexi head 3/8" drive
ratchet with 6” locking extension
interference fit
For all the remaining 6 spark
plugs the following tools are
required:
bent handle flexi head ratchet with
2” locking extension
universal joint
interference fit

Point: selecting tools for spark plug (7)
removal.
7. Remove spark plugs (7). NGK T20231A HR8

18 Nm
8. Cover holes with masking tape (6).
Install spark plug
212
Care Ensure AV mount is tightend using
Point: the bottom hex head.
1. Replace ignition coil AV mount (8)
2. Check electrode distance (arrow) before you

install the spark plugs (7).
Care Check engine functions correctly
Point: with no misfires before installing
engine side covers.
Care Please follow the sequence when

Point: installing the ignition coil:
1. Ensure correct fittment of plug.
2. Rotate coil 90 degrees
clockwise while applying firm
downward pressure.
3. Rotate 180 degrees anti
downward pressure.
clockwise to sit above engine
mount.
3. Install components in reverse order. 213
4.Read-out, delete error memory.

2. Check electrode distance (arrow) before you
install the spark plugs (7).
Care Check engine functions correctly
Point: with no misfires before installing
engine side covers.
Care Please follow the sequence when

Point: installing the ignition coil:
1. Ensure correct fittment of plug.
2. Rotate coil 90 degrees
downward pressure.
downward pressure.
clockwise to sit above engine
mount.
4. Read-out, delete error memory.
Torque settings
FG04 Powertrain / F01 Power Unit / Power Unit / AA-RM-04F01-01-026 - Remove/install spark plug
Bolt Ignition coil - mount M6 x 20 6 Nm
Spark plug NGK T20231A HR8 18 Nm
214
Date of publication: 15.01.2014 MP4-12C Coupe
Service sheet : Mileage Dependent Tasks
Please refer to this mileage chart against vehicle odometer reading whilst carrying out service
Customer: km / miles:
Vehicle registration : VIN: Date:
Colour: Service Time: Task specific
Address : Invoice / Job no:
Engine compartment
Replace clutch oil and filter (Every 30,000km only or 20,000 miles only) 0.5 units
Replace transmission oil and clean filter (Every 60,000 km or 40,000 miles only) 0.5 units
Replace engine spark plugs (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only) 2.8 units
Replace fuel system filter (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only) 8.2 units
Clean out condensor area (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only) 1.1 units
Associated Documents
Document Number Document Title
AA-RM-02A03-04-006 Remove/install side cover - Engine compartment cover
AA-RM-02A04-04-008 Remove/install transmission floor panel
AA-RM-04G01-01-015 Drain and refill - Clutch fluid
AA-RM-04G01-01-017 Remove/install filter - Clutch fluid
AA-RM-04G01-01-014 Remove/install fluid - Transmission
AA-RM-04G01-01-016 Remove/install filter - Transmission fluid
AA-RM-04F01-01-026 Remove/install Spark plug
AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install Radiator grille
AA-RM-03K01-01-001 Remove/install Fuel filter
Consumables / Sundries
Comments
Technician Name:
Technician Signature: Dealer Stamp:

Printed copy is not controlled
215
Service sheet : 1st year or 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
Please check vehicle odometer reading against mileage dependant task service sheet before carrying out service
Colour: Service Time: 5.85 units
Vehicle acceptance (customer present from 1.1 to 1.4)

1.0 - Vehicle pre-checks Not
Completed Comments
Completed
1.1 Check for wheel locking key (if supplied)
1.2 Check tyre orientation, damage, and crack formations
1.3 Inspect wheel rim condition
1.4 Check bodywork
1.5 Check McLaren Retailer Portal for any outstanding campaigns on vehicle
Check paint and panels for defects - please mark the picture as following: ( D dent - S scratch - X damage )
Vehicle exterior/fluid and battery checks - (ensure battery charger and body protection are fitted)
2.0 - Two technicians will be required for steps 2.1 and 2.2 Not
Completed Comments
Completed
2.1 Check exterior lighting function
2.2 Check headlamp/windscreen washer system
2.3 Check headlamp adjustment - Ref. AA-RM-02A02-04-003
2.4 Replace wiper blade
2.5 Check window glazing
2.6 Check exterior light glazing
2.7 Check gaps and seals of doors, engine cover, and luggage compartment lid
2.8 Check fuel filler flap manual opening
216
Not
Completed Comments
Completed
2.9 Check controls and adjusters in general (hinges, doors, luggage lid and engine cover)
2.10 Check battery connections and charge (physical check) - Ref. AA-RM-02A02-03-004
2.11 Check cabin filter (replace as required) - Ref. AA-RM-02A02-03-004
2.12 Check/adjust fluid level of brake system
2.13 Check/adjust fluid level of power steering - Ref. AA-RM-03D01-01-008
2.14 Check/adjust fluid level of windshield washer system
Interior function checks

3.0 - Carry out cluster checks Not
Completed Comments
Completed
3.1 Check battery condition
3.2 Check engine oil level - Ref. AA-RM-04F02-01-007
3.3 Check TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)
3.4 Check indicator lamps and warning lamps
4.0 - Carry out IRIS checks Not

Completed Comments
Completed
4.1 Check operation of IRIS system (audio/phone/sat nav/pc/cameras)
5.0 - Carry out interior functional checks Not

Completed Comments
Completed
5.1 Check central locking and alarm system
5.2 Check interior controls (switches, lights, windows) and parking sensors (if fitted)
5.3 Check heated rear window function
5.4 Check operation of heating, ventilation and air conditioning system
5.5 Check condition of interior trim (seats, door casings, centre console, facia, carpets)
5.6 Check exterior door mirrors function and powerfold, rear view mirror, and sun visors
5.7 Check condition and operation of seat belts/buckles (ensure belts are not twisted)
5.8 Check brake pedal free play
5.9 Check operation of EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)
Mechanical checks
6.0 - Secure/lift vehicle on lifting platform - Ref. AA-RM-02A04-04-005 Not
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

6.1 Check/enter tyre pressure
6.2 Measure tread depth (mm) FL: FR: RL: RR:
Outside
Center
Inside
6.3 Check front/rear axle wheel bearing play
6.4 Check front/rear ball joints for play
6.5 Check front/rear track rods for play
217
7.0 - Remove wheels - Ref. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Not
Completed Comments
Completed
7.1 Check brake pads (replace if necessary)
7.2 Check condition of brake discs (weigh all of them if CCM) - Ref. AA-RM-03C01-01-006
7.3 Check EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) pads (replace if required)
7.4 Check brake system for routing, leaks, and damage (bleed brakes if required)
7.5 Check/clean air ducts of brake system
8.0 - Remove all under floors - Ref. AA-RM-02A04-04-001/002/003/005/006/008 Not

Completed Comments
Completed
8.1 Check all visible parts for routing, leaks, and damage (cooling system)
8.2 Check powertrain system for leaks (engine, transmission, and exhaust)
8.3 Check all visible steering components for leaks and damage
8.4 Check engine mounts
8.5 Tighten screws, nuts, and bolts (including exhaust system, clips and strips in general)
8.6 Check torques on suspension - Ref. AA-RM-03B01-02-002/003, 03B02-01-001/002
8.7 Check condition of drive shafts
9.0 - Remove rear wheel arch liners (carry out steps 9.2 to 9.6 while oil is draining) Not
Completed Comments
Completed
9.1 Drain engine oil - Ref. AA-RM-04F02-01-011
9.2 Check Z-bar drop links for play
9.3 Check/clean air filter elements (replace as required) - Ref. AA-RM-04F01-02-002
9.4 Check transmission and clutch fluids are not overfilled
9.5 Check front lower exhaust manifold nuts/studs and exhaust manifold
9.6 Check radiator/low temp cooler condition, check for any damage (clean as necessary)
10.0 - Lower vehicle Not

Completed Comments
Completed
10.1 Replace engine oil filter - Ref. AA-RM-04F02-01-003
10.2 Fill engine oil (5 litres to start) - Ref. AA-RM-04F02-01-011
10.4 Top up and recheck level as required
11.0 - Lift vehicle Not

Completed Comments
Completed
11.1 Visual inspection for general leaks
218
Underside of vehicle
12.0 - Install all under floors - Ref. AA-RM-02A04-04-001/002/003/005/006/008 Not
Completed Comments
Completed
12.2 Install wheels - Ref. AA-RM-03B03-01-001
13.0 - Lower vehicle to ground Not

Completed Comments
Completed
13.1 Check wheel bolt torque values (130 Nm)
13.2 Replace engine ISG (Intake Sound Generator) - Ref. AA-RM-04F01-01-037
13.3 Check corrosion/antifreeze protection and enter here: °C
13.4 Check exhaust emission label (market specific)
13.5 Check injection/ignition system connections and harness
13.6 Check/adjust fluid level of cooling system
13.7 Check vehicle steering alignment (adjust as required)
14.0 - Road test (carry out 14.1 and 14.2 whilst on test. Max 30 min / 6 miles) Not
Completed Comments
Completed
14.1 Check airbrake function
14.2 Check navigation system (if fitted)
15.0 - Finish road test and carry out documents/safety device/final checks Not
Completed Comments
Completed
15.1 Replace key fob battery and clean contacts with Electrolube CCS
15.2 Check function of all keys, locks, and fobs
15.3 Check for towing eye
15.4 Read out fault memory, clear errors, and zero service interval counter via MDS
15.5 Report and rectify all recorded defects
15.6 Check/stamp service and warranty guide
219
Step Reference Document Number Document Title
2.3 AA-RM-02A02-04-003 Adjust headlamp
2.10 and 2.11 AA-RM-02A02-03-004 Remove/install luggage bin - Rear
2.13 AA-RM-03D01-01-008 Fill/bleed fluid - Steering system
6.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-007 Secure/lift vehicle on lifting platform
7.0 and 12.2 AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/install Wheel
7.2 AA-RM-03C01-01-006 Cleaning/checking CCM brake discs
8.0 and 12.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-001 Remove/install floor panel - Engine/fuel tank
8.0 and 12.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-002 Remove/install floor panel - Front
8.0 and 12.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-003 Remove/install floor panel - Tunnel
8.0 and 12.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-005 Remove/install floor panel - Rear lower extension
8.0 and 12.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-006 Remove/install guide vane
8.0 and 12.0 AA-RM-02A04-04-008 Remove/install transmission floor panel
8.6 AA-RM-03B01-02-002 Remove/install lower wishbone - front
8.6 AA-RM-03B01-02-003 Remove/install upper wishbone - front
8.6 AA-RM-03B02-01-001 Remove/install upper wishbone - rear
8.6 AA-RM-03B02-01-002 Remove/install lower wishbone - rear
9.1 and 10.2 AA-RM-04F02-01-011 Drain and refill engine oil
9.3 AA-RM-04F01-02-002 Remove/install air filter
10.1 AA-RM-04F02-01-003 Remove/install Oil Filter
10.3 AA-RM-04F02-01-007 Check engine oil level
13.2 AA-RM-04F01-01-037 Remove/install intake sound generator
Comments
Technician Name:
220
Service sheet : 2nd year or 30,000 km (20,000 miles)

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
221
Not
Completed Comments
Completed
2.11 Replace cabin filter - Ref. AA-RM-02A02-03-004
2.12 Bleed brake fluid system as required (while servicing) - Ref. AA-RM-03C01-01-005

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
222
Completed Comments
Completed
7.3 Replace electronic parking brake pads (every 2 years) - Ref. AA-RM-03C02-01-001
7.4 Check brake system for leaks/damage (bleed as required) - Ref. AA-RM-03C01-01-005

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Replace clutch oil and filter (Every 30,000km or 20,000 miles only)
9.3 Replace air filter - Ref. AA-RM-04F01-02-002
9.5 Check transmission and clutch fluids (when mileage is not achieved) are not overfilled
9.6 Replace clutch oil and filter (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-04G01-01-015/021
9.7 Visually check condensor area for debris

Completed Comments
Completed
10.4 Top up and re-check level as required

Completed Comments
Completed
223
Completed Comments
Completed
12.2 Replace wheel nut bolts

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
224
2.12 and 7.4 AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
7.3 AA-RM-03C02-01-001 Remove/install pads - parking brake
9.7 AA-RM-04G01-01-015 Remove/install fluid - Transmission / Clutch
9.7 AA-RM-04G01-01-017 Remove/install filter - Transmission / Clutch fluid
Comments
Technician Name:
225
Service sheet : 3rd year or 45,000 km (30,000 miles)

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
226
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
227
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Replace cooling system fluid
9.6 Replace cooling system fluid - Ref. AA-RM-03L01-01-005

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
228
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
15.4 Check expiry dates of fire extinguisher/tyre inflation kit (if fitted)
229
9.7 AA-RM-03L01-01-005 Drain and refill cooling system
Comments
Technician Name:
230
Service sheet : 4th year or 60,000 km (40,000 miles)

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
231
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
232
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Replace transmission oil and clean filter (Every 60,000 km or 40,000 miles only)
9.7 Replace transmission oil / clean filter (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-04G01-01-014/016

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
233
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
234
9.6 AA-RM-04G01-01-015 Drain and refill - Clutch fluid
9.6 AA-RM-04G01-01-017 Remove/install filter - Clutch fluid
9.7 AA-RM-04G01-01-014 Drain and refill - Transmission Fluid
9.7 AA-RM-04G01-01-016 Remove/install filter - Transmission fluid
Comments
Technician Name:
235

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
236
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
237
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
238
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
239
Comments
Technician Name:
240

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
241
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
242
Completed Comments
Completed
Replace fuel system filter (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only)
9.7 Replace clutch oil and filter (only if mileage achieved) AA-RM-04G01-01-015/021
9.8 Replace fuel system filter (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-03K01-01-001
9.10 Clean out condensor area (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-02A02-02-005

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Replace engine spark plugs (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only)
13.5 Replace engine spark plugs (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-04F01-01-026
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
243
7.3 AA-RM-03C02-01-001 Remove/install pads - Parking brake
9.8 AA-RM-03K01-01-001 Remove/install fuel filter
9.10 AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install Radiator grille
10.1 AA-RM-04F02-01-003 Remove/install oil filter
13.5 AA-RM-04F01-01-026 Remove/install spark plug
Comments
Technician Name:
244

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
245
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
246
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
247
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
248
Comments
Technician Name:
249

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
250
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
251
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
252

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
253
Comments
Technician Name:
254

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
255
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
256
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
257
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
258
Comments
Technician Name:
259

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
260
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
261
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
262
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
263
9.7 AA-RM-04G01-01-015 Remove/install fluid - Transmission / Clutch
9.7 AA-RM-04G01-01-017 Remove/install filter - Transmission / Clutch fluid
Comments
Technician Name:
264

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
265
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
266
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
267
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
268
Comments
Technician Name:
269

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
270
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
271
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Replace fuel system filter (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only)
9.7 Replace clutch oil and filter (only if mileage achieved) AA-RM-04G01-01-015/021
9.8 Replace fuel system filter (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-03K01-01-001
9.11 Clean out condensor area (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-02A02-02-005

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
272
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Replace engine spark plugs (Every 90,000 km or 60,000 miles only)
13.5 Replace engine spark plugs (only if mileage achieved) - Ref. AA-RM-04F01-01-026
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
273
7.3 AA-RM-03C02-01-001 Remove/install pads - Parking brake
9.8 AA-RM-03K01-01-001 Remove/install fuel filter
9.11 AA-RM-02A02-02-005 Remove/install Radiator grille
10.1 AA-RM-04F02-01-003 Remove/install oil filter
13.5 AA-RM-04F01-01-026 Remove/install spark plug
Comments
Technician Name:
274

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
275
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
276
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
277
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
278
Comments
Technician Name:
279


Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
280
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
281
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
282
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
283
9.6 AA-RM-04G01-01-017 Remove/install filter - Clutch
Comments
Technician Name:
284

Completed Comments
Completed
1.4 Check bodywork
Completed Comments
Completed
285
Not
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Mechanical checks
Completed Comments
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside
286
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
287
Completed Comments
Completed

Completed Comments
Completed
14.0 Ensure battery is disconnected - Ref. AA-RM-05M01-01-001 Not

Completed Comments
Completed
Replace all airbags and seatbelts (15 years only)
14.1 Replace driver airbag - Ref. AA-RM-06N04-01-003
14.2 Replace passenger airbag - Ref. AA-RM-06N04-01-004
14.3 Replace driver head curtain airbags - Ref. AA-RM-06N04-01-002
14.4 Replace passenger head curtain airbags - Ref. AA-RM-06N04-01-002
14.5 Replace driver kneebag (market specific)
14.6 Replace passenger kneebag (market specific)
14.7 Replace driver seatbelt - Ref. AA-RM-06N04-01-001
14.8 Replace passenger seatbelt - Ref. AA-RM-06N04-01-001
Completed Comments
Completed
Completed Comments
Completed
288
14.1 AA-RM-06N04-01-003 Remove/install driver airbag
14.2 AA-RM-06N04-01-004 Remove/install passenger airbag
14.3 and 14.4 AA-RM-06N04-01-002 Remove/install head curtain airbag
14.5 AA-RM-06N04-01-007 Remove/install driver kneebag
14.6 AA-RM-06N04-01-006 Remove/install passenger kneebag
14.7 and 14.8 AA-RM-06N04-01-001 Remove/install seatbelt
Comments
Technician Name:
289
Track Day Event Pre/Post Checks
All checks to be carried out to the vehicle before/after a track day event
Customer : km / miles :
Vehicle registration : VIN : Date :
Colour : Service Time : 1.25 units (Fe discs) - 2.50 units (CCM discs)
Address : Invoice / Job no :
Vehicle exterior and fluid checks

Completed Rectified
Completed
1.4 Check/adjust fluid level of brake system (bleed if required) - Ref. AA-RM-03C01-01-005
1.6 Check windscreen wiper blade condition

Completed Rectified
Completed
Not
3.0 - Carry out interior functional checks Completed Rectified
Completed
3.2 Check Airbrake function using Dynamic Control Panel
Mechanical checks
Completed Rectified
Completed
FL: FR: RL: RR:

Outside
Center
Inside

Completed Comments
Completed
5.2 Visually check brake pads (replace if necessary)
5.3 Visually check condition of brake discs (Remove and weigh if CCM) - Ref. AA-RM-03C01-01-006
6.0 - Remove Engine floor panel - Ref. AA-RM-02A04-04-001 Not

Completed Rectified
Completed
6.1 Check Engine/Transmission for leaks
6.3 Check front/rear ball joints and track rods for play
6.4 Check torque on suspension components
6.5 Check all underfloors, tyre spoilers and front/rear guide vanes for damage
7.0 - Install Engine floor panel - Ref. AA-RM-02A04-04-001 Not

Completed Rectified
Completed
Not
8.0 - Lower vehicle to ground Completed Rectified
Completed
8.1 Check wheel bolt torque values (130Nm)

290
Final operations
9.0 - Carry out documents/safety devices checks Not

Completed Rectified
Completed
9.1 Check for wheel locking key
9.2 Check for emergency fuel funnel
9.3 Install/Remove towing eye - Install (pre)/Remove (post)
9.4 Check for fire extingusher (option)
9.5 Check for first aid kit (option)
10.0 - Carry out final checks Not

Completed Rectified
Completed
1.4 AA-RM-03C01-01-005 Fill/bleed fluid - Brake system
5.3 AA-RM-03C01-01-006 Cleaning/Checking carbon ceramic discs (CCM) / Iron discs (Fe)
Comments
Technician Name :
Technician Signature : Dealer Stamp :
291
Mclaren.book Page 1 Monday, July 18, 2011 8:57 AM
CONTENTS
BEFORE YOU DRIVE .............................................. 8
DRIVING CONTROLS ............................................50
INSTRUMENTS .................................................... 102
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE .........................132
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN .........................154
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY .................... 202
INDEX .................................................................... 215

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The documents supplied with your McLaren are Driving Controls

Introduction an integral part of the vehicle. Ensure that you This section contains detailed information
Please read this information to familiarise pass them onto the new owner if you sell the regarding the equipment and driving controls
yourself with your McLaren MP4-12C and its vehicle. fitted to your McLaren and how to use those
features before you drive. This provides the The information is divided into specific controls to best effect during a journey.
necessary information for you to get the sections, to assist in finding the particular
optimum benefit and enjoyment from your Instruments
information you require:
McLaren. This section contains information on the
This publication must not be reproduced, Before you drive instrument cluster, including information of how
translated or reprinted, in whole or in part, Details the settings you need to make in the to view and change vehicle settings.
without written permission from McLaren cockpit to ensure you are fully prepared and
Automotive Ltd. The equipment fitted to your have safe and easy access to all controls
McLaren may vary from that shown depending before driving.
on vehicle and market specification.
McLaren is constantly updating its vehicles to
meet and exceed the latest technologies.
McLaren therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in design, equipment and
technical features at any time.
2
INTRODUCTION
Comfort and Convenience Data and Technical glossary

Contains information on those systems and Refer to this section when you need
features which make the cockpit a pleasant information regarding the fluids and quantities
environment in which to spend time. that are required for the various systems on
your McLaren, or when you need to know a
Maintaining your McLaren specific piece of data relating to your McLaren
Information on maintaining your McLaren is or its performance.
here. Also included is advice on using your
The Technical glossary contains a brief
McLaren in winter weather and if you choose to
explanation of some of the more complex
drive your vehicle abroad, what to do if
systems fitted to your McLaren. A McLaren
something should go wrong and how to
Dealer will be able to assist should you need
manage any possible problems which arise as
more information.
a result. Information on fuses, light bulbs and
what to do if you experience a puncture. Index
The table of contents and the index will help
you find information quickly, when you need it.
3
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Optional equipment
You will find the following symbols in this Owner * Optional equipment is identified with
handbook. These symbols are intended to give an asterisk.
you an instant visual message on what type of The equipment fitted to your McLaren
information is being displayed. may vary from that shown depending
on vehicle specification.
Warnings Environmental note
A warning draws your attention to Environmental notes give you tips on
activities that could cause injury or minimising the impact of you and your
death. vehicle on the environment.
Notes
Notes draw your attention to activities

that contain possible risks to your
McLaren, provide advice that you may
find useful, or give additional
information regarding a particular
subject.
4
INTRODUCTION
Vehicle use
Operating safety
Observe the following when using your
WARNING: The electronic systems McLaren:
fitted to your McLaren interact with
 the safety notes throughout this information;
each other. Tampering with these systems
could cause malfunctions in other  road traffic laws and regulations.
interconnected systems. Such faults could WARNING: There are various warning
seriously endanger the operational safety of labels attached to your McLaren. These
your McLaren and your own safety. are intended to make you and others aware
of various risks. Do not remove any warning
Additional work or modifications made to
labels from the vehicle.
the vehicle, which have been carried out
incorrectly can also affect its operating If you remove these warning labels, you or
safety. others may not then be aware of dangers,
which may result in an injury.
5
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
OPENING AND CLOSING Supplementary Restraint System ....................................... 32

General ................................................................................ 8 Child passengers................................................................ 36
Opening a door .................................................................. 10 Footwells ............................................................................ 38
Locking a door ................................................................... 11 MIRRORS
Mis-lock .............................................................................. 12 Safety ................................................................................. 39
Individual settings .............................................................. 12 Interior mirror ...................................................................... 39
Locking and unlocking from inside ..................................... 12 Exterior mirrors ................................................................... 39
Opening a door from inside................................................ 13
LIGHTING
Closing a door .................................................................... 13
Light switch......................................................................... 41
Automatic locking............................................................... 14
Main beam headlamps ....................................................... 42
Engine cover ...................................................................... 15
Daytime running lamps....................................................... 43
Luggage compartment ....................................................... 16
Rear fog lamp ..................................................................... 43
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Direction indicators ............................................................. 44
Alarm system ..................................................................... 18 Hazard warning lamps........................................................ 44
Immobiliser......................................................................... 18 Parking lights ...................................................................... 45
Tow-away protection .......................................................... 19
WIPER AND WASHERS
Interior motion sensor ........................................................ 20
Windscreen wiper ............................................................... 46
SEATS
Safety ................................................................................. 21
Manual seats...................................................................... 22
Electric seats...................................................................... 24
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
Steering wheel adjustment................................................. 28
Horn ................................................................................... 28
OCCUPANT SAFETY
Seat belts ........................................................................... 29
7
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
BEFORE AND
YOUCLOSING
DRIVE
Keyless entry Five sensors detect where the key fob is

OPENING
General around the vehicle.

Keyless entry allows the driver to unlock and
The vehicle can be unlocked or locked either by disarm the vehicle by simply opening the door
using the keyless entry feature, or by pressing when the key fob is within 1.5 metres (5 feet) of 2
the appropriate button on the key fob. the vehicle. The key fob needs only to be on
the driver's person or in a non-metallic 4
Both methods are activated by the key fob.
container such as a bag. It does not need to be
For your convenience, provided that the engine exposed or handled.
is not running, the car can be locked
irrespective of the electrical status, see Vehicle 1 5
electrical status, page 50.
1. In vehicle sensor
2. Left-hand door sensor
3. Right-hand door sensor
4. Cup holder sensor
5. Luggage compartment sensor
8
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Key fob entry WARNING: The key fob allows the Car washes
Your McLaren includes two remote control key engine to be started and is also used to NOTE: To prevent inadvertent opening of
fobs. The key fob allows you to remotely lock activate other features on the vehicle. a door when using an automatic car wash,
and unlock the vehicle. Take the key fob with you, every time you always lock the doors before entering the
NOTE: To prevent theft, only use the key leave the vehicle. wash. If you intend to remain inside the vehicle,
fob in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. press the interior central locking button to
NOTE: Do not expose the key fob to high ensure the doors do not open. The light in the
The key fob locks and unlocks the following: levels of electromagnetic radiation. Doing button will illuminate to indicate that the doors
so may cause it to function incorrectly.
 the doors (including fuel filler flap); are locked.
 the luggage compartment; Stowing the key fob For more information, see Washing your
For security, it is recommended that the key fob McLaren, page 192.
stays on your person when you are in the car. If using a car wash where your car will remain
If, however, you wish to stow the key fob within stationary during the wash cycle and you intend
the car, ensure that it is not left in plain view. to exit the vehicle prior to washing, lock it using
NOTE: Do not stow the key fob in the the key fob and stand well clear of the vehicle
centre console stowage compartment or and the car wash, to ensure that the key fob is
in the cup holders as the system will not detect at least 3 metres (9.8 feet) or greater distance
its presence and the engine will not start. away from the vehicle and car wash.
Discharged battery
If you are unfortunate enough to experience a
fully discharged battery, the vehicle can still be
opened using the mechanical key, see
Unlocking - discharged battery, page 177.
To unlock the vehicle, using the key fob, press

the unlock button (arrowed) on the key fob. The
front and rear direction indicators and the side
repeaters flash twice and the anti-theft alarm
system is deactivated.
9
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
2. The door latch will then release, allowing

Opening a door the door to be partially raised before it
WARNING: Always stand to the rear of automatically swings outwards and
the door before opening it, as the upwards. The mirrors will unfold if folded.
opening action may cause injury. The speed NOTE: When the door is opened, the
that the door opens will be affected by window will lower slightly. It will raise
ambient temperature. to the closed position once the door is shut.
NOTE: Because the door opens outwards If the window does not lower, take care
and then upwards, ensure sufficient side when opening and closing the door. Do not
and overhead clearance before opening a door, force the door during opening or closing, as
see Vehicle dimensions, page 206. this could lead to the door seals or window
1 2
becoming damaged.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked using
the key fob but the doors or luggage
1. Touch the underside of the door panel (1) compartment are not opened, the vehicle
and slowly move your hand from front to will re-lock after 30 seconds.
rear. If keyless entry is used, the front and
rear direction indicators and the side
repeaters flash twice and the anti-theft
alarm system is deactivated.
NOTE: The door needs to sense
movement in the direction described to
release the door latch. The sensor will not
be activated if it is just touched or the hand
is moved from the rear to the front.
10
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
4. The indicators flash to indicate that the anti-

Locking a door theft alarm system is activated and the
mirrors will fold.
NOTE: An audible 'mis-lock' signal will
sound if there is an attempt to lock the
vehicle when the key fob is inside the
vehicle, see Mis-lock, page 12.
1 2
3. If using the keyless entry feature, touch the

underside of the driver's side air intake
1. Close the door. panel (2).
2. To lock the vehicle using the key fob, press NOTE: Ensure the key is within a 1.5m
the lock button (arrowed) on the key fob. (5 feet) range when using the keyless
The front and rear direction indicators and entry feature.
the side repeaters flash in a rapid, circular
NOTE: The sensor will recognise a
sequence around the car. The anti-theft
single touch.
alarm system is activated.
11
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Mis-lock Individual settings Locking and unlocking from inside

If you frequently travel without passengers, you
can change the locking system so that only the
driver's door is unlocked, see Auto Door Lock,
page 112.
P
If only the driver's door has been configured to

unlock, the passenger’s door can only be
unlocked by either touching the underside of
D
the door panel for a second time, pressing the
unlock button on the key fob again or by
pressing the central locking button on the
R
centre console.
If either the door, the luggage compartment lid 1. Press the central locking button (arrowed)
or the engine cover is left open or the key fob is to lock the vehicle, the light in the button will
still inside the vehicle and the lock button illuminate to indicate that the vehicle is
(arrowed) is pressed, there will be a momentary locked.
sounding of the alarm horn to alert you. 2. Press the central locking button again to
Check that the doors, the luggage unlock the vehicle and the light in the button
compartment lid or the engine cover are all will extinguish.
closed and re-lock the vehicle.
12
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Opening a door from inside Closing a door

20.0 C
0
AUTO
A door can be opened from inside the vehicle 1. Exit the vehicle.
at any time, even if it has been locked. Open MONO
AC
AUTO
2. Push the door downwards and ensure that

the doors only if the vehicle is stationary and it latches securely.
road and traffic conditions permit.
WARNING: Ensure no-one can be
NOTE: Because the door opens outwards trapped as the door closes.
and then upwards, ensure sufficient side
NOTE: If window does not close, this may
and overhead clearance before opening a door.
be due to an anti-trap event. To resolve
this, please try one of the below options:
 Reopen and close door;
 Press lock button on key fob to request
window close;
1. Pull door handle upwards, in direction of  Lock vehicle using the sensor on the
arrow, and push the door outwards until the underside of the air intake panel.
opening mechanism takes over. The door In the event of continuous anti-trap events, you
will then swing outwards and upwards can revert the window to manual mode. This is
automatically. done by placing your hand on the exterior lock
NOTE: When the door is opened, the sensor for a period of time. The window will
window will lower slightly. It will raise continue to rise until you remove your hand
to the closed position once the door is shut. from the sensor. This will only be available if
If the window does not lower, take care the above three methods do not resolve the
when opening and closing the door. Do not anti-trap event.
force the door during opening or closing, as NOTE: Do not force the door closed, the
this could lead to the door seals or window door seals or window could be damaged.
becoming damaged.
13
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Automatic locking
The doors and the luggage compartment lock
automatically after the vehicle has driven away.
NOTE: The doors unlock automatically in
an accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a predetermined level.
The automatic locking function can be switched
off, see Auto Door Lock, page 112.
14
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Engine cover
Opening
WARNING: The exhaust tail pipes can
be very hot and there is a risk of severe
burns. Only open the engine cover from the
side of the vehicle.
WARNING: There is a risk of injury if
the engine cover is open, even when
MONO
AC
AUTO
the engine is not running.
20.0
AUTO
0
C
Engine components become very hot and
there is a risk of severe burns.
The engine ignition system carries a high
voltage. Never touch ignition system
1. Press the release button (arrowed) on the 2. From the side of the vehicle, grasp the
components; ignition coil, ignition cables,
rear face of the driver's door, the engine lower edge and lift the engine cover. The
(spark plug connections).
cover will open slightly. gas struts will support it in the raised
position.
Closing
WARNING: The exhaust tail pipes can
be very hot and there is a risk of severe
burns. Only close the engine cover from the
side of the vehicle.
Pull the engine cover down squarely from the
side of the vehicle and ensure that the cover
latches securely on both sides.
15
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Luggage compartment
Opening
P
2. Alternatively, press the button (arrowed) to 3. Release the safety latch and open the
unlock and open the luggage compartment. luggage compartment.
NOTE: The luggage compartment will
1. Press the button (arrowed) on the key fob only open if the vehicle is stationary.
the luggage compartment will unlock and
open slightly.
NOTE: The luggage compartment is
located at the front of the vehicle.
16
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OPENING AND CLOSING
Closing
WARNING: Ensure that no-one can be
trapped as you close the luggage
compartment.
1. Pull the luggage compartment lid down
firmly and ensure that it is latched securely.
NOTE: Do not leave the key fob in the
luggage compartment, as the vehicle
will lock, and you may be locked out of the
car.
NOTE: If the vehicle had previously
been locked, it will still be locked and
the indicators will flash as the lid closes.
17
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Alarm system Immobiliser

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the The immobiliser prevents your McLaren from
alarm system is armed and any of the following being started by an unauthorised person.
P
are opened. The vehicle is automatically immobilised when

 a door; it senses that there is no key fob present in the
 the engine cover; vehicle.
D
 the luggage compartment. Remobilisation occurs when a key fob is
NOTE: The alarm remains triggered even sensed inside the vehicle.
if you close the open aperture. To silence R
the alarm, unlock the vehicle.

The alarm system also incorporates the
following features:
 tow-away protection; 2. The light in the central locking button
 interior motion sensor. (arrowed) will illuminate for a period of time
and will begin flashing to indicate that the
Arming the alarm system alarm is armed.
1. Lock the vehicle (using the keyless system
or the key fob). The anti-theft alarm system Disarming the alarm system
will be armed after approximately 15 1. Unlock the vehicle (using the keyless
seconds. system or the key fob), the alarm will disarm
and the light in central locking button will
stop flashing.
18
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
2. Close the driver's door and lock the vehicle

Tow-away protection (using the keyless system or the key fob).
Tow-away protection is designed to prevent any Tow-away protection remains disabled until
attempt to steal the vehicle by suspended tow you unlock the vehicle.
or by lifting onto a trailer.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is raised or
tilted in any way.
Tow-away protection is armed approximately
30 seconds after the vehicle has been locked
MONO
AC
AUTO
and is disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked.
20.0
AUTO
0
C
Disabling tow-away protection
Disable tow-away protection manually if your
vehicle is being transported, e.g. loaded onto a
ferry or vehicle transporter or is parked on a 1. To disable tow-away protection, switch off
movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage. the ignition, open the driver's door and
press the button (arrowed) on the rear edge
of the driver's door. The light in the switch
will illuminate to indicate that tow-away
protection has been disabled.
NOTE: You cannot disable tow-away
protection if the ignition is switched on.
19
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
2. Close the driver's door and lock the vehicle

Interior motion sensor (using the keyless system or the key fob).
The alarm is triggered if your vehicle is locked The interior motion sensor remains disabled
and movement is detected inside, e.g. if until you unlock the vehicle.
someone breaks a window or reaches into the
vehicle through an open window.
The interior motion sensor is armed
approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle has
been locked and is disarmed when the vehicle
is unlocked.
MONO
AC
AUTO
20.0
AUTO
0
C
NOTE: To prevent false alarms close the
windows when leaving the vehicle and do
not hang anything on the interior mirror.
Disabling the interior motion sensor

1. To disable the interior motion sensor, switch
Disable the interior motion sensor if people or off the ignition, open the driver's door and
animals are to remain in the locked vehicle. press the button (arrowed) on the rear edge
of the driver's door. The light in the switch
will illuminate to indicate that the interior
motion sensor has been disabled.
NOTE: You cannot disable the interior
motion sensor if the ignition is
switched on.
20
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
WARNING: Ensure that no-one can WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury
SEATS
Safety become trapped as the seat moves. to a child in an accident, sharp braking
WARNING: Adjust the driver's seat or a sudden change in direction:
To reduce the risk of injuries in the event of
when the vehicle is stationary. You an accident, observe the following:  Children under 1.35 m tall or younger
may not be able to observe road and traffic than 12 years of age must be secured in
conditions and you could lose control of the  All vehicle occupants must select a seat
position that allows the seat belt to be a suitable child restraint.
vehicle as a result of the seat moving. You
worn correctly, but is as far away from  If you are using a child restraint on the
could therefore cause an accident.
the front air bags as possible. The passenger seat, move the seat as far
WARNING: The seats can be moved position of the driver's seat must allow back as possible.
even without a key fob in the vehicle. the driver to drive the vehicle safely. The
Do not leave children unattended in the distance from the driver's seat to the
vehicle, they could be injured if a seat is pedals must be such that the driver can
moved accidentally. fully depress the pedals. The distance
between the driver's chest and the
centre of the air bag cover must be more
than 25 centimetres. The driver's arms
should be slightly bent when holding the
steering wheel.
 Vehicle occupants must always wear
their seat belt correctly.
 Position the passenger seat as far back
as is comfortable.
21
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
WARNING: Ensure the seat is locked in Manual seat backrest rake adjustment
Manual seats position before driving. WARNING: To minimise the risk of
Manual seat forward and rearward NOTE: Ensure that there are no items of injury, position the backrest as close
adjustment luggage in the footwell or behind, as possible to vertical.
underneath or to the side of the seats. This may
lead to the seats being damaged.
Lift the lever (arrowed), move the seat to the Lift the lever (arrowed), move the seat backrest
desired position and release the lever to lock to the position required, and release the lever.
the seat.
22
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
Manual seat height adjustment
Press the switch (arrowed) up or down until the

seat reaches the desired height.
NOTE: Height adjustment is only available
on the driver's seat.
23
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
Forward or rearward adjustment Electric seat backrest rake adjustment

Electric seats*
WARNING: To minimise the risk of
Electric seat adjustment injury, position the backrest as close
The seat adjustment switch is on the front face as possible to vertical.
of the seat base.
NOTE: Ensure there are no items of
2
luggage in the footwell or behind, beneath
or to the side of the seats, or the seats may be
damaged.
2
1
3
1
3
Press the switch (1) up or down until the seat
reaches the desired position.
Press the switch (2) up or down until the

backrest is in the required position.
WARNING: Ensure there are no items
beneath the passenger seat or the
occupant protection system may not
function correctly.
24
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
Electric seat height adjustment Electric seat lumbar adjustment Storing a seat and mirror position
Specific seat and exterior mirror positions can
be stored for each driver.
2 2
2 1
1
4 3
3
Press the switch (3) up or down until the seat Press (1) to select lower lumbar support or
reaches the desired height. press (2) to select upper lumbar support.
Press (3) to inflate or (4) to deflate the selected Set the seat and mirrors to the desired
lumbar support. positions, see Electric seats*, page 24 and
Exterior mirrors, page 39.
Press and hold the memory set button (1) and
then simultaneously press any of the memory
position buttons (2) to store the setting.
25
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
Recalling a seat and mirror position Comfort entry/exit

WARNING: Only recall a seat and WARNING: Ensure that no-one can
mirror position when the vehicle is become trapped as the seat moves.
stationary. You may not be able to observe
When Comfort entry/exit is active, the driver's
road and traffic conditions and you could
seat will move fully rearwards and to its lowest
lose control of the vehicle as a result of the position when the ignition is off and the driver's
seat moving. You could therefore cause an
door is opened.
accident.
This assists exit from the vehicle. To switch the
feature on or off, see Comfort Entry/Exit,
page 113.
2
1 Use the seat and mirror memory recall feature
to return the seat to your preferred position. If
no seat positions are stored in memory,
readjust the seat using the controls.
Press the button (2) where the required setting

is stored, and hold until the seat and mirrors
have completed their adjustment.
26
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

SEATS
Heated seats Press button (1) again to switch seat heating

WARNING: To avoid the risk of injury, off.
constantly monitor the seat The seat heater will remain in operation until
temperature. switched off.
Press button (1) once to switch seat heating to

the low temperature setting, the button
illuminates amber. Press again to switch to the
high temperature setting, the button illuminates
red.
27
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

Steering wheel adjustment Horn

WARNING: Only adjust the steering Press the centre of the steering wheel to
wheel when the vehicle is stationary. operate the horn.
You may not be able to observe road and NOTE: The horn can be operated when
traffic conditions safely. This could lead to
the ignition is switched off.
you losing control of the vehicle which may
result in an accident.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height
and reach.
Push the lever (highlighted) downwards and

position the steering wheel so that:
 your arms are slightly bent when you hold
the wheel;
 you can move your legs freely;
 you can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
Pull the lever to secure the steering wheel.
Ensure the lever is locked before driving.
28
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
OCCUPANT SAFETY
 is not routed across your neck or under Children under 1.35 m tall or younger than
Seat belts your arm; 12 years of age must be secured in a
Seat belts and child restraint systems are the  pull upwards on the shoulder belt to suitable child restraint. Follow the
most effective means of restraining vehicle check it fits closely across your pelvic manufacturer's instructions when installing
occupants from impact forces, which, in turn, area. child restraint systems.
minimises the danger of injury from interior
Do not secure any objects with a seat belt if
impacts and the effects of whiplash.
the seat belt is being used by a vehicle
WARNING: A seat belt which is not occupant.
worn, is worn incorrectly, or has not
Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
been engaged fully in the seat belt buckle,
cannot perform its intended function. To Do not route the belt across sharp edged or
avoid injuries, ensure that all vehicle fragile objects especially if these are on or
occupants wear their seat belt correctly at in your clothing The seat belt could be
all times. damaged and you could be injured.
Ensure that the belt: Only one person should use each seat belt
at any one time.
 is routed as low as possible across your
pelvic area, i.e. across your hip joints Never allow children to travel on the lap of
and not across your abdomen; another occupant.
 fits closely;
 is not twisted;
 is routed across the middle of your
shoulder;
29
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
WARNING: Pregnant women should WARNING: The seat belt cannot

wear a seat belt to ensure maximum perform its function correctly if the
safety of mother and unborn child. Position seat belt or buckle are dirty or damaged.
the lap belt across the hips, beneath the Ensure the belt latch engages the buckle
abdomen and position the diagonal belt fully.
between the breasts and to the side of the
Check the seat belts regularly to ensure that
abdomen. Ensure the belt is not slack or they are not damaged, or routed over sharp
twisted.
edges and are not trapped. The belt could
WARNING: The seat belt only provides tear in an accident, causing injury to
its intended degree of protection if the occupants.
seat backrest is positioned close to vertical,
Have seat belts checked if the belts have
and the occupant is sitting upright. been damaged or subjected to a heavy load.
Work on the seat belts should only be
carried out by a McLaren Dealer.
30
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Wearing a seat belt 3. With the belt correctly positioned insert the If the belt tensioners are triggered, a bang will
latch into the buckle and press until a click be heard, a small amount of dust may be
is heard to confirm engagement. released and the Supplementary Restraint
System warning light will illuminate.
Seat belt tensioners
The seat belts incorporate belt tensioners. Belt Belt force limiters
tensioners apply tension to the seat belts in an The seat belts incorporate belt force limiters.
accident, pulling them tight against the Belt force limiters are tuned to the front air bags
occupant. and gradually release the tension being applied
WARNING: Do not insert the belt latch to the belts during an impact, thus reducing the
into the passenger seat belt buckle if force exerted on occupants.
the passenger seat is unoccupied. The belt
Seat belt warning light
tensioners could be triggered in an
The seat belt warning light in the
accident.
instrument cluster and a warning tone
WARNING: Belt tensioners do not reminds vehicle occupants to fasten their seat
correct an incorrect sitting position or belts. The seat belt warning light extinguishes
1. Ensure that you are seated comfortably and incorrectly worn seat belts. and the warning tone ceases when the driver
the controls are within easy reach.
Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back and passenger have fastened their seat belt.
2. Grasp the seat belt latch and pull across the
towards the backrests.
body, ensuring that the belt lies flat across
the mid point of the collar bone between the The belt tensioner will be triggered for each
neck and shoulder, then across the chest seat belt, provided the belt latch is engaged in
and pelvis. the seat belt buckle, if a head-on or rear-end
collision occurs and the vehicle decelerates or
accelerates rapidly.
31
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
WARNING: To reduce the risk of

Supplementary Restraint System injuries in the event of an accident,
Air bag system observe the following points:
Your McLaren is equipped with the following air  Ensure that the driver's chest is at least
bags: 25 centimetres (10 inches) from the air
bag cover.
 driver's front air bag in the steering wheel;
 Do not lean forward over the dashboard
 passenger front air bag in the dashboard;
while the vehicle is in motion.
 side head air bags in the doors.
 Do not rest your feet on the dashboard.
WARNING: Air bags are not a
 Only hold the steering wheel by the
substitute for correctly worn seat belts,
outside of the rim. You could be injured
they enhance the level of occupant
if the air bag deploys and you are
protection offered by seat belts.
holding the inside of the steering wheel.
WARNING: Correct operation of the air  Occupants, particularly children must
bags can only be guaranteed if the not lean on the doors from inside the
steering wheel, the passenger air bag cover vehicle.
and the door trim are not covered.
 Ensure that there are no other objects
between the vehicle occupants and the
deployment area of the air bags.
 Because of the high speed at which air
bags deploy, there is a risk of injuries
caused by an inflating air bag.
32
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Front air bags Side head air bags

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury
to occupants if a side head air bag is
1 2 triggered, ensure that:
 there are no other objects between the
MON
O
AC
AUTO
A
4
5
6
7
8
N
vehicle occupants and the deployment
3 9
area of the air bags;

ABS
13:5
13
3:59
599
2 0
KPH
PH
C UISE
CRU
70
70
SE OIL
WATE
ER
HA DLIN
HAND INGG P
N RMA
NO
NOR MAL
AL
POWER
POW RTR
RAIN
AIN F EL
FUE
SPOR
SPO RT
T P
 no accessories are attached to the

doors;
 no heavy or sharp objects are left in the
START
pockets in clothing;
 occupants - in particular, children - must
ENGINE
E
STOP
S S
N
N
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
never lean their head on the doors.

P
D The side head air bags (left-hand arrowed) are

located in the upper area of each door panel,
The driver's front air bag (1) deploys in front of
the steering wheel and the passenger front air and are deployed if the system determines they
can offer additional protection for the head of
bag (2) deploys in front of and above the
the occupant on the side of the vehicle on
dashboard.
which the impact occurs.
The front air bags are deployed if the system
NOTE: The passenger side head air bag
determines they can offer additional protection
for occupants against head and chest injuries. is only deployed if the passenger seat is
occupied.
NOTE: The passenger front air bag is only
triggered if the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF warning light on the overhead console is
NOT illuminated, see Occupant classification
system - front passenger seat, page 34.
33
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Occupant classification system - front The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light WARNING: To ensure that the
passenger seat illuminates when the ignition is switched on and occupant classification system
The system can determine if the passenger extinguishes after 5 seconds. functions correctly, never place objects
seat is occupied using weight sensors in the The warning light will remain illuminated if the under the seat.
seat base and by checking the seat belt buckle passenger seat is unoccupied or if a child seat WARNING: To ensure that the
engagement on the passenger seat belt. The is fitted. occupant classification system
passenger front air bag will not be active unless functions correctly, never place objects
a specific weight is exceeded. This allows child NOTE: The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
(e.g. a cushion) under the child restraint
restraint systems to be used on the passenger warning light is always illuminated unless
the specific weight is exceeded. system. The entire base of the child
seat. restraint system must be in contact with the
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning seat at all times. If a child restraint system
light is illuminated, the passenger front air bag is not fitted correctly it may not provide the
is not active. The side head air bag and the belt intended degree of protection in the event
tensioner on the passenger side remain active of an accident and may cause injuries.
even if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
2
PASS
ENGER
AIR BA
G OF
F
warning light is illuminated.
2
WARNING: If the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF warning light is not
illuminated when the child seat is fitted, the
front air bag is not deactivated. The child
could be seriously injured if the passenger
air bag inflates.
The status of the air bags is indicated by the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light
(arrowed) on the overhead console.
34
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Air bag deployment Supplementary Restraint System warning Safety features

In the event of a collision, the air bags deploy light If you are unfortunate enough to be involved in
and the Supplementary Restraint System The Supplementary Restraint System an accident the following events will occur to
warning light will illuminate, see Supplementary performs a self-test at regular intervals assist you and any recovery personnel:
Restraint System warning light, page 35. when the ignition is switched on and the engine  the doors will unlock;
is running.
Air bag deployment slows down and restricts  the hazard warning lights will switch on;
the movement of the vehicle occupant reducing The warning light in the instrument cluster  the interior lighting will switch on;
the load on the body. The air bags are in a illuminates when you switch on the ignition and
depressurised state following an accident. extinguishes 5 seconds after the engine is In some instances, the fuel system will also be
started. switched off;
WARNING: If the air bags are deployed,
a bang will be heard and a small WARNING: A malfunction has occurred
amount of fine powder may be released. if any of the following occur. Contact a
The noise will not damage your hearing and McLaren Dealer.
the powder does not constitute a health
 the warning light does not illuminate
hazard nor does it imply that a fire has
when you switch on the ignition;
broken out. This powder could cause short-
term breathing difficulties for persons  the light does not extinguish a few
seconds after the engine is running;
suffering from asthma or other respiratory
conditions. To prevent breathing  the light illuminates again, after the
difficulties, leave the vehicle as soon as engine has started.
possible or open a window.
WARNING: After an air bag has been
triggered, air bag parts are hot, do not
touch them. Have the air bags replaced at a
McLaren Dealer.
35
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Child restraint systems

Child passengers
Secure any child under 1.35 m tall or younger
WARNING: Do not leave children than 12 years of age travelling in the vehicle in
unsupervised in the vehicle even if an appropriate category restraint according to
they are secured in a child restraint. their weight. McLaren recommend the use of PASS
2 ENGE
Children could injure themselves on parts specific child restraints. Contact a McLaren
R AIR
BAG
OFF
2
of the vehicle, open a door and be seriously Dealer for advice.

or even fatally harmed by prolonged
exposure to heat or cold.
Category Weight
If children open a door, they could cause
injury to others in doing so or get out of the Category 0 Up to 10 kg
vehicle and possibly injure themselves or
they could be injured by a passing vehicle. Category 0+s Up to 13 kg
Do not expose the child restraint system to Category I 9 to 18 kg

direct sunlight. The metal parts of the child WARNING: Never secure a rearward-
Category II 15 to 25 kg
restraint system could burn the child. facing child restraint system on the
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside Category III 22 to 36 kg passenger seat if the passenger front air
the vehicle unless they are secured. bag is active. The status is indicated by the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator.
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load
increases the risk of injury to the child
during sharp braking, a sudden change of
direction or an accident.
36
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
WARNING: If a forward facing child WARNING: If the child restraint system

seat is fitted to the passenger seat, has not been fitted correctly, the child
make sure that the passenger seat is fully cannot be restrained in an accident or
rearwards and is positioned at the lowest sudden braking and could be injured. When
height. A manual passenger seat does not fitting a child restraint system, observe the
20
.0 C
0
AUT
O have height adjustment. manufacturer's instructions on the correct
use of the child restraint.
Never place objects (e.g. a cushion)
underneath the child restraint. The base of
the child restraint system must always be in
full contact with the seat. If a child restraint
system is not fitted correctly it may not
provide the intended degree of protection
and may even cause injuries.
WARNING: If the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator does not illuminate,
do not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the passenger seat. Use a
forward-facing child restraint system on the
passenger seat. The warning label on the
passenger side is there to remind you of
this.
37
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

OCCUPANT SAFETY
KISI child seat function 4. When the seat belt has retracted as far as
possible, pull on the upper section to check
Footwells
Your McLaren is fitted with a KISI system which
is an automatic locking seat belt on the that the seat belt has locked. WARNING: Never store any items of
passenger side designed to temporarily lock NOTE: The KISI system will any description in either footwell to
the seat belt to securely hold the child restraint disengage when the seat belt has fully ensure that nothing can impede operation
in the passenger seat. retracted and can then be worn as a normal of the controls or become a hazard in the
seat belt. Once the KISI system has event of an accident.
1. Extend the passenger seat belt fully. The
KISI system only engages when the seat unlocked, it will be necessary to fully extend Ensure any mats are correctly fitted and
belt is fully extended. the seat belt to engage the KISI system the secured.
next time a child restraint is used.
NOTE: If the vehicle is parked on a hill
the inertia lock may stop the seat belt
extending. If this occurs, release the seat
belt slightly and continue to extend the seat
belt carefully to avoid the engagement of
the inertia lock.
2. Pass the seat belt through the child restraint
as described by the child restraint
manufacturer and engage the belt latch in
the buckle.
3. Adjust the belt so that the lower section is
tight against the restraint and allow the
upper section to retract. The KISI system
will click as the belt retracts.
38
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

MIRRORS
MIRRORS
Safety Interior mirror Exterior mirrors

WARNING: Before driving, adjust all Adjust the interior mirror, to get a good view of WARNING: In some markets, the
mirrors to give the best possible view the road and traffic conditions. exterior mirrors have convex glass
of road and traffic conditions. Move the lever on the bottom of the mirror to fitted. This type of mirror enlarges the field
of vision, but reduces the size of the image.
avoid being dazzled by lights from vehicles
This means that objects are closer than
behind.
they appear.
To avoid misjudging the distance to
vehicles travelling behind and perhaps
causing an accident, check the actual
distance of the vehicle, before changing
direction.
The exterior mirrors control is located on the
dashboard between the steering wheel and the
centre console.
39
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

MIRRORS
Adjusting mirrors Exterior mirror fold Exterior mirror automatic fold

1. Switch the ignition on. 1. Switch the ignition on. The exterior mirrors can be set so that they fold
2. Rotate the control to position (3) to fold the automatically when the vehicle is locked.
mirrors. Unfolding occurs as a door is opened, not when
1 2 3. To unfold the mirrors rotate the control away
the vehicle is unlocked. See Auto Fold Mirrors,
page 112.
from position (3).
P NOTE: If the switch remains in Mirror dipping in reverse
position (3) the mirrors will be folded The exterior mirrors can be set to dip when
6
5 7
8
N
until the switch is moved. reverse is engaged. This provides a view of the
9
ABS
0
KPH
CRUISE
70
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
OIL
WATER
FUEL
P
P
ground to the rear of the vehicle. See Reverse
3 Mirror Dip, page 113.
P
Heated mirrors
Exterior mirrors are heated when the rear
screen heater is in operation, and the engine is
START
ENGINE
running. They are also heated when the
ambient temperature is below 5°C (41°F).
2. Rotate the control to the left (1) to adjust the
left-hand mirror or to the right (2) to adjust
the right-hand mirror.
3. Move the control up, down left and right to
adjust the mirror to the desired position.
40
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

LIGHTING
Automatic light control

LIGHTING
Light switch
A The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
WARNING: The lights do not switch on are switched on automatically when ambient
0 1
automatically in foggy conditions. light falls below a predetermined level.
Automatic light control is only an aid, you To switch on automatic light control, turn the
A
are responsible for the vehicle's lighting at 0 1

light switch to position (A).
all times. 2
2
The light switch is located between the steering A
4
wheel and the door and has the following 13:59

2
positions.
20.0 C
0
AUTO
0 1
MONO
AC
AUTO
At position (0), the lights are off.

Rotate the control to position (A) for automatic
light control.
Rotate the control to position (1) for sidelamps
or position (2) for headlamps. The side lamp or
headlamp warning light illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: A warning tone sounds if the
driver's door is opened while the
sidelamps or headlamps are switched on.
41
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

LIGHTING
Sidelamps Headlamp flash

Main beam headlamps
The sidelamps and the daytime running lamps Pull the stalk fully towards you.
are a combined series of Light Emitting Diodes The main beam headlamps operate for as long
located around the outside of the dipped beam
as the stalk is held.
headlamp. The sidelamps operate at a lower
intensity than the daytime running lamps, see 6
The main beam headlamps warning light
5 7
Daytime running lamps, page 43. A

4 8 illuminates in the instrument cluster.
3 9
ABS
13:59 CRUISE OIL
2 70
The sidelamps and licence plate lamps HANDLING

NORMAL
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
WATER
FUEL
P
illuminate when the light switch is turned to 20.0 C

0
AUTO
position (1).
The sidelamps warning light in the MONO
AUTO
instrument cluster illuminates.
Headlamps
START
ENGINE
E
To switch on the headlamps, turn the light S

STOP
T
AERO
switch to (2).
The headlamps warning light in the To switch to main beams, push the stalk away
instrument cluster illuminates. from you.
The main beam headlamps warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Pull the stalk towards you, to revert to dipped
beams.
42
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

LIGHTING
Daytime running lamps Rear fog lamp

Your McLaren is fitted with daytime running NOTE: The rear fog lamp only operates
lamps which illuminate automatically when the when dipped beam headlamps are on.
ignition is switched on even if all lights are Ensure that the dipped beam headlamps are
switched off. The sidelamps and the daytime
switched on.
running lamps are a combined series of Light
Emitting Diodes located around the outside of
the dipped beam headlamp. The daytime
running lamps operate at a higher intensity than A
the sidelamps. 0 1
4
A
3
13:59
2
0 1
Press the fog light button (arrowed) in the

centre of the light switch.
The warning light in the instrument cluster
and the light in the switch both illuminate.
43
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

LIGHTING
Indicators - lane change

Direction indicators Hazard warning lamps
Move the indicator/main beam stalk until
resistance is felt when changing lanes on a The hazard warning lamps operate even if the
motorway. The appropriate indicator flashes ignition is switched off. As a safety feature, they
three times. switch on automatically when an air bag is
triggered.
For further information about the lighting see
Light switch, page 41. Operating the hazard warning lamps
6
5 7
4 8
2 A
3 9
N
ABS
13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
20.0 C
0
AUTO
MONO
AUTO
Push the indicator/main beam stalk downwards

(1) to switch on the left-hand indicator. R
Push the indicator/main beam stalk upwards

(2) to switch on the right-hand indicator.
The corresponding warning light in the
instrument cluster will flash. 1. Press the hazard warning lamps button
The stalk returns to its rest position as the (arrowed).
steering wheel returns to its central position. 2. All the indicator lamps and both indicator
warning lights in the instrument cluster
flash.
44
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

LIGHTING
3. Press the hazard warning lamps button 2. To switch the parking lights off, move the
again to switch off. Parking lights indicator/main beam stalk to the central
position.
NOTE: If the hazard warning lamps
have been switched on automatically, NOTE: If the ignition is switched on while
press the hazard warning lamps button the parking lights are still on, the
once to switch them off. indicators will not operate until the parking
lights are switched off.
Panic alarm
The panic alarm function is designed to attract
attention by sounding the horn and flashing the
indicator lamps repeatedly.
The panic alarm can be switched on by
pressing the hazard warning lamps button for a
period of 3 seconds or more.
The horn will cease after the panic alarm has
been active for a long period of time, but the
indictor lamps will continue to flash. The horn NOTE: The parking lights can only be
can be re-initiated by pressing the hazard switched on when the ignition is switched
warning lamps button for a period of 3 seconds off.
or more. 1. To switch the parking lights on, press the
To switch the panic alarm off, press the hazard indicator/main beam stalk down for the left-
warning lamps button a single time. hand side or push up for the right-hand
side. The selected parking lights will
illuminate.
45
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

WIPER AND WASHERS
Operating the windscreen wiper To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor, see
WIPER AND WASHERS
Windscreen wiper Wiper Sensitivity, page 114.

1. Ensure the ignition is switched on.
2. Move the wiper stalk to the required NOTE: Automatic wipe is cancelled when
4 position a door is opened. This prevents occupants
exiting the vehicle from being sprayed with
NOTE: If the windscreen wiper is
3 water. Wiping continues when the door is
switched on and the vehicle comes to
closed again.
a halt, the windscreen wiper automatically
2
6
5 7
A
4 8
N
switches to intermittent wipe, until the Slow wipe
3 9
13:59
2 0 CRUISE
70
OIL
ABS
vehicle moves away.

KPH
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
WATER
FUEL
P
1 Move the wiper stalk to position (3), to operate

20.0 C
0
Automatic wipe the wipers at slow speed.
AUTO
A rain sensor, located on the windscreen Return the stalk to position (1) to switch off.
MONO
AUTO
behind the rear view mirror, measures the

quantity of water on the screen and operates Fast wipe
the wiper at the most appropriate speed. Move the wiper stalk to position (4), to operate
the wipers at fast speed.
To select, move the windscreen wiper stalk to
1. Windscreen wiper off the automatic wipe position (2). Return the stalk to position (1) to switch off.
2. Automatic wipe
The wiper will wipe once. The wipe frequency
3. Slow wipe then depends on how wet the windscreen is.
4. Fast wipe
Only select the automatic wipe position in
NOTE: Switch off the windscreen wiper in damp weather conditions or when it is raining.
dry weather, dirt can cause inadvertent
wiper sweeps which could damage the wiper
blade or windscreen.
46
BEFORE YOU DRIVE

WIPER AND WASHERS
Single wipe Windscreen wash/wipe When the stalk is released, the wiper will
complete its cycle and return to the parked
position. After a period of time the wiper will
operate once more to wipe any remaining
washer fluid from the windscreen.
NOTE: The position of the washer jets are
set during vehicle manufacture and should
not need adjusting. If a problem occurs, consult
a McLaren Dealer.
Headlamp wash
The headlamp wash only operates when the
headlights are on. The system monitors the
windscreen wash/wipe function, and every
seventh operation triggers the headlamp wash.
When the ignition is switched off, the automatic
1. For a slow single wipe, briefly push the Pull the wiper stalk towards you. headlamp wash count resets to zero.
wiper stalk and release. The wiper will NOTE: The headlamp washers do not
The windscreen washers and wiper will operate
operate once at slow speed, without operate at speeds above 100 mph, (160
at a slow speed for as long at the stalk is held.
washers. kph).
2. For a fast single wipe, push and hold the
wiper stalk down. The windscreen wiper will
perform a continuous fast wipe until the
stalk is released.
47
DRIVING CONTROLS
STARTING AND DRIVING Hill hold control ................................................................... 79

Vehicle electrical status ..................................................... 50 Brake-steer ......................................................................... 80
Switching on the ignition .................................................... 51 Electronic brake pre-fill ....................................................... 80
Instruments and warning lights .......................................... 52 Electronic Stability Control ................................................. 80
Seamless Shift Gearbox gear positions ............................. 55 Airbrake .............................................................................. 83
Parking brake ..................................................................... 57 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System ...................................... 86
Brake pedal ........................................................................ 59 ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER (ASL)
Starting/stopping the engine .............................................. 60 Setting an upper speed limit ............................................... 89
Driving ................................................................................ 62
CRUISE CONTROL
Parking Sensors................................................................. 64
Overview ............................................................................ 90
SEAMLESS SHIFT GEARBOX Using cruise control ............................................................ 91
Overview ............................................................................ 66 Cancelling cruise control .................................................... 92
Gear positions .................................................................... 66 Increasing cruise speed ..................................................... 92
Accelerator pedal position.................................................. 67 Reducing cruise speed ....................................................... 93
Manual/Automatic mode .................................................... 68 Resuming a stored speed .................................................. 93
HANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS RUNNING IN
Active dynamics control ..................................................... 71 Running in .......................................................................... 94
Active button ...................................................................... 71 Normal/Road use ............................................................... 95
Handling control ................................................................. 72 Track use............................................................................ 95
Powertrain control .............................................................. 74
REFUELLING
Winter mode....................................................................... 75
Filling with fuel .................................................................... 96
Launch control ................................................................... 76
Recommended fuel ............................................................ 98
DRIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
WINTER DRIVING
General .............................................................................. 78
Winter driving ..................................................................... 99
Anti-lock Braking System ................................................... 78
Brake Assist System .......................................................... 79
Brake disc wiping ............................................................... 79
49
DRIVING CONTROLS
STARTING AND DRIVING
DRIVING CONTROLS
Locked Accessory
Vehicle electrical status

Vehicle is locked in low power mode. START/STOP button is pressed, when car is in
The vehicle will implement one of the following Awake mode.
statuses according to the criteria detailed. Sleep
Windows and Heater/air conditioning controls
NOTE: The engine can be started from Vehicle is unlocked in low power mode.
operate. Head unit and instrument cluster
any of the following states, except Locked. menus are available.
Awake
If the car is in Sleep mode, the START/STOP
Door is opened or START/STOP button If there is no further activity after 15 minutes,
button will need to be pressed for more than
pressed, when the car is in Sleep mode. the vehicle will return to the Sleep status.
two seconds.
Time, odometer reading and battery status are
NOTE: If the vehicle detects the battery
available in the left-hand display. Fuel gauge
charge is getting too low, it will adopt the
operates in right-hand display.
Awake status to conserve energy. Accessory
and Ignition will be prohibited, but Crank will If there is no further activity after two minutes,
still be available. This is to allow the engine to the vehicle will return to the Sleep status.
be started so that battery recharging can
commence.
50
DRIVING CONTROLS
Ignition 3. The ignition will switch on, the oil

Switching on the ignition temperature, water temperature and fuel
START/STOP button is pressed, when car is in
Accessory mode. 1. Ensure that the key fob is inside the vehicle. gauges will operate and several of the
warning lights will illuminate as a self-test.
NOTE: There is no time out with ignition
The instrument cluster will fully illuminate.
on. Be aware that the battery could
become discharged. START
ENGINE
STOP
Crank S S
N
T
T
See Starting/stopping the engine, page 60. AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
2. To switch on the ignition without starting the

engine, press the START/STOP button
(arrowed), without depressing the brake
pedal.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in Awake
mode, press the START/STOP button
twice.
51
DRIVING CONTROLS
Main instruments overview Left-hand display overview

Instruments and warning lights
Warning lights can be divided into different
1
categories, according to the colour that they 6
5
illuminate. 6
5 7
4
 RED, AMBER or YELLOW - indicates that a 8
4
fault has been detected. A fault indicated by A
a RED light is more important than one A N 3
3 9
displayed in AMBER or YELLOW. HOME 13.59
2
0
ODOMETER TEMPERATURE
13:59 PL r&
 BLUE or GREEN - indicates that a system
CRUISE OIL
2 KPH
70
WATER
RANGE TRIP
1
HANDLING PL PL
or feature is switched on and operating. 1
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT
HOME 13.59
1. Tachometer, page 102
ODOMETER TEMPERATURE
2. Speedometer, page 102 PL r&
RANGE TRIP
PL PL
The left-hand display provides vital information

to the driver as well as the facility to
personalise some vehicle settings. It also
enables operation of the Media, Trip Computer,
Navigation and Telephone.
52
DRIVING CONTROLS
Warning lights - left-hand side

Electronic Stability Control, page 80
5
6
7
Electronic Stability Control, page 80
A
4 8
A N
3 9
ABS
13:59
0
Brake warning light, page 59
CRUISE OIL
2 KPH
70
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
20.0 C
0
AUTO
13:59 Seat belt warning light, page 31

MONO
AUTO
General warning - illuminates in

conjunction with other warning lights
START
Rear fog lamp, page 43

ENGINE
E
STOP
Use the control stalk to navigate through the

menus. Sidelamps, page 42
Headlamps, page 42
Main beam headlamps, page 42
Direction indicators, page 44
A
Gearbox mode indicator
53
DRIVING CONTROLS
Right-hand display overview Warning lights - right-hand side

Direction indicators, page 44
N 1
N
Engine warning light, page 63
9
ABS 2 Supplementary Restraint System
ABS
CRUISE OIL
warning light, page 35
70 3 CRUISE OIL
HANDLING
WATER P 70
NORMAL HANDLING
WATER P ABS
Anti-lock Braking System status light,
FUEL
POWERTRAIN NORMAL
SPORT P
POWERTRAIN FUEL
page 79
SPORT P
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

operation, page 86
4
Parking brake, page 57
P
1. Oil temperature, page 128 Parking brake, page 57

P
2. Water temperature, page 129
3. Fuel level, page 130
N
Gear position indicator
4. Handling control, page 72
Powertrain control, page 74
54
DRIVING CONTROLS
Drive
Seamless Shift Gearbox gear positions
All seven forward gears are available.
D
Gear changes will be automatic, unless
P manual mode has been selected.
When drive is selected and the brakes are
released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly
without any throttle use making it useful for
D parking manoeuvres and for moving off in
queuing traffic.
Neutral
R No gear is engaged. Releasing the brakes
N
will allow the vehicle to move freely, e.g.
by pushing or towing.
Reverse
In normal circumstances, select reverse
The gearbox operates in either automatic or R
gear when the vehicle is stationary. When
manual mode. Automatic mode is selected carrying out parking manoeuvres that require
unless the driver chooses manual mode, see rapid changes from drive to reverse and back
Manual/Automatic mode, page 68. If manual again, it is possible to engage reverse at
mode is active, gear changes are made using speeds up to 6 mph (10 kph).
the gearshift paddles, see Gearshift paddles,
page 69.
55
DRIVING CONTROLS
Gearshift paddles As an alternative, upshifts can be made by When the vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
pushing the left-hand paddle away from you kph) or the vehicle is stationary with a gear
and downshifts can be made by pushing the selected, select a downshift and hold the
right-hand paddle away from you. paddle to select neutral.
4
5
6
7
8
The gearshift paddles operate irrespective of
A
3 9
N
ABS
the handling and powertrain program selected,
13:59
0
and there is no need to release the accelerator
CRUISE OIL
2 KPH
70
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
pedal to change gear.

WARNING: For safety, in manual mode
only, the vehicle will monitor engine
speed and may perform an automatic gear
change if necessary.
WARNING: Do not change down for
additional engine braking on a slippery
S
surface.
N
To upshift, pull the right-hand paddle towards NOTE: If operating the paddles in
you. To downshift pull the left-hand paddle automatic mode, the gearbox will revert to
towards you. The current gear position appears automatic changes if an eight second period
in the gear position display, see Gear position elapses without a gear change being made.
indicator, page 126.
To immediately shift to the lowest possible gear
NOTE: The single-piece paddle and while the vehicle is moving, select a downshift
central pivot enables upshifts and and hold the paddle.
downshifts to be made using either paddle.
56
DRIVING CONTROLS
If there is a malfunction with the parking

Parking brake P
brake, the amber parking brake
START
ENGINE
WARNING: Do not place small items STOP
malfunction status light in the instrument cluster
such as coins in the parking brake S S
illuminates and the bar in the parking brake
N
T
T
recess as this could inhibit the operation of AERO MANUAL
switch flashes. Contact a McLaren Dealer as
the parking brake switch. soon as possible.
ACTIVE
NOTE: When parking on steep downhill WINTER LAUNCH
slopes, turn the front wheels towards the

kerb. When parking on steep uphill slopes, turn
the front wheels away from the kerb.
P
Pull the parking brake switch upwards to

P
apply. The bar in the parking brake switch
and the red parking brake applied status light in
the instrument cluster illuminates.
If the parking brake applied status light is
flashing, the parking brake has failed to
engage/disengage. To resolve,
engage/disengage the parking brake again.
The bar in the parking brake switch will always
show the same state as the parking brake
applied status light.
57
DRIVING CONTROLS
NOTE: If the parking brake is not manually

START
released, it will automatically release as
ENGINE
STOP
the vehicle is driven off forward, or in reverse
N
S S
as long as the following conditions are met:
N
T
T
 All doors are closed;
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
 Drivers seat belt is buckled.
WINTER LAUNCH NOTE: It is only possible to disengage the
parking brake with the ignition on. The
parking brake can be applied in all ignition
states, including car asleep.
P
NOTE: In the event of total footbrake
failure, the parking brake can be applied
when in a when the vehicle is moving to slow
the vehicle.
Keep the brake pedal depressed, and
P
press the parking brake switch
downwards to disengage. The bar in the
parking brake switch and the red parking brake
applied status light in the instrument cluster
extinguishes.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
manually released, the vehicle may
start to move.
58
DRIVING CONTROLS
Brake discs and pads

Brake pedal
WARNING: New brake pads require a
WARNING: Do not keep any objects in period of bedding in. For the first 625
the driver's footwell. Ensure that floor miles (1000 km), avoid situations where
mats or carpets are properly secured and heavy braking is required.
do not obstruct the pedals.
Brake disc and pad wear depends on the
If objects become trapped between the driving style and driving conditions.
pedals, you would not be able to brake or
accelerate, and this could lead to an Brake warning light
accident. The brake warning light will illuminate
WARNING: The braking system is when the ignition is switched on as a
servo assisted when the engine is system test. If the brake warning light
running. The brakes will still function with illuminates at any other time, a fault is
the engine off, but more pressure will be indicated. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
required to operate them. permits and contact a McLaren Dealer
immediately.
WARNING: Do not rest your foot on the
brake pedal while travelling as this may
overheat the brakes, reduce their efficiency
and cause excessive wear.
WARNING: If the brake warning light
illuminates while the vehicle is in
motion, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and contact a McLaren Dealer
immediately.
59
DRIVING CONTROLS
Manual cranking Timed cranking

Starting/stopping the engine
1. Ensure that the key fob is in the vehicle. 1. Ensure that the key fob is in the vehicle.
WARNING: Never run the engine when
the vehicle is in an enclosed space.
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous carbon
monoxide. Breathing exhaust fumes could START
ENGINE
START
ENGINE
STOP STOP
lead to unconsciousness and death.

S S S S
N
T
T
NOTE: Do not depress the accelerator AERO MANUAL AERO MANUAL
pedal when starting the engine.

ACTIVE ACTIVE
The engine can be either started using manual

WINTER LAUNCH WINTER LAUNCH
cranking or timed cranking.

To change between the cranking functions of
the START/STOP button, see Timed Crank,
page 113. P P
2. Depress the brake pedal, and continuously 2. Depress the brake pedal, and press the
press the START/STOP button, the engine START/STOP button, the engine will start.
will start. 3. If the START/STOP button is pressed again
3. Cranking can be stopped by either while the engine is cranking, cranking is
releasing the brake pedal, or releasing the stopped.
START/STOP button.
60
DRIVING CONTROLS
Loud start 4. Depress the brake pedal and then press Stopping the engine
NOTE: The loud start feature is only the START/STOP button to activate the WARNING: The gearbox has no Park
available when restarting a hot engine. 'loud start' feature. The engine speed will position to lock the gears. The parking
initially be higher on start up, giving an brake is the only means of preventing the
enhanced mechanical noise and exhaust vehicle moving.
3 note.
START
NOTE: Do not depress the accelerator
ENGINE
STOP pedal when stopping the engine.
S S
Do not switch the engine off immediately after

N
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
high speed/high load running. Allow it to run for

2 ACTIVE
60 seconds so the engine temperature returns
to normal.
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
NOTE: When parking on steep downhill

slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
kerb. When parking on steep uphill slopes, turn
P
the front wheels away from the kerb.
1. Pull the parking brake switch upwards to
apply.
1. Switch on the ignition, see Switching on the
NOTE: If the parking brake is not
ignition, page 51.
applied manually, it will apply
2. Press the ACTIVE button. automatically when the engine is not
3. Rotate the powertrain control to the ‘T - running, and the drivers door is open.
Track’ setting. Automatic application can be overridden by
holding the parking brake switch in the
down position whilst opening the driver
door.
2. Select neutral.
61
DRIVING CONTROLS
1. With the engine running, press and hold the

Driving brake pedal.
START
Driving away 2. Select drive or reverse gear, or initiate an
ENGINE
STOP
WARNING: Never turn the engine off upshift by operating the gearshift paddles.
S S
while driving, there will be no For more information, see Gearshift

N
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
assistance for the steering or the foot paddles, page 69 and Gear positions,
ACTIVE
brake. You will need more effort to steer and page 66.
brake and could lose control of the vehicle 3. Keep the brake pedal depressed and
WINTER LAUNCH
and cause an accident. release the parking brake switch. The red
warning light in the instrument cluster and
NOTE: Do not drive at high engine speeds
the bar in the parking brake switch
until the engine has reached normal
extinguish.
P
operating temperature.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
NOTE: The doors will lock when the
manually released, the vehicle may
vehicle reaches a speed of approximately
3. Press the START/STOP button. The engine start to move.
9 mph (15 kph).
stops, the vehicle enters the Accessory NOTE: If the parking brake is not
state, see Vehicle electrical status, page 50. ENVIRONMENTAL: When starting from manually released, it will automatically
The immobiliser is activated. cold, gear changes occur at higher engine release as the vehicle is driven off forward,
speeds. The catalytic converter will reach its or in reverse as long as the following
NOTE: If the START/STOP button is operating temperature quicker and reduce
pressed for more than a second, the conditions are met:
engine emissions.
vehicle will enter the Awake state for a brief  All doors are closed;
time before returning to Accessory state if  Drivers seat belt is buckled.
no further inputs are made, see Vehicle 4. Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
electrical status, page 50.
62
DRIVING CONTROLS
Engine warning light Economical driving

This engine warning light illuminates when Improved fuel economy can be achieved by
the ignition is on and extinguishes as soon following this advice.
as the engine is started, provided no faults
 accelerate smoothly and gently from a
exist.
standing start;
If the light illuminates while driving, an engine  when in manual mode, avoid high engine
management fault has been detected and rpm by changing to a higher gear as soon
reduced engine performance may be as possible;
experienced. Stop the vehicle as soon as
 avoid labouring or over-revving the engine;
safety permits and contact a McLaren Dealer
 switch off the air conditioning when it is not
immediately.
needed;
 avoid journeys where frequent stop start
driving is involved;
 ensure that your driving style suits the
prevailing road and traffic conditions; allow
time for smooth, progressive acceleration
and braking;
 use a fuel economy tracking website to
track your mileage and fuel usage.
63
DRIVING CONTROLS
The front parking sensors are automatically The centre sensors on the front bumpers have
Parking Sensors* switched on when the ignition is switched on. a range of approximately 1 metre (3 feet). The
The rear parking sensors are switched on when centre sensors in the rear bumper have a range
reverse gear is selected. The light around the of approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
parking sensors button will illuminate red to
An intermittent tone is heard when an
indicate that parking sensors are active.
obstruction is within range. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstruction, the frequency
P
of the tone increases. When the distance
5
6
7
8
between the sensors and the obstruction is less
N
0
KPH
9
CRUISE
70
HANDLING
OIL
WATER
ABS
P
than approximately 40 centimetres (1.5 feet),
NORMAL
the tone becomes continuous.

POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
START
ENGINE
STOP
The parking sensors alert the driver to any

obstructions while manoeuvring at low speeds.
The system comprises four ultrasonic sensors
in the front bumper, four ultrasonic sensors in
the rear bumper and two sounders. Each
sounder has a different pitch to indicate
whether the obstruction is at the front or the
rear of the vehicle.
64
DRIVING CONTROLS
WARNING: The parking sensors may The rear parking sensors are automatically
not detect moving objects such as switched off when reverse gear is de-selected.
children and animals, until they are
The front parking sensors can be switched off
dangerously close. Always manoeuvre with manually by pressing the button, the light
caution and always use your mirrors and
around the button will extinguish.
look behind you.
If a fault is detected, a long high-pitched tone
NOTE: The parking sensors are for
will sound. If the sensors are obscured by dirt,
guidance only and are not intended to
ice or snow, clean them. If the problem persists,
replace the driver's visual checks for contact a McLaren Dealer.
obstructions when manoeuvring. The parking
sensors may not detect some obstructions,
such as narrow posts or small obstructions
close to the ground such as kerbs.
65
DRIVING CONTROLS
SEAMLESS SHIFT GEARBOX
Neutral
Overview Gear positions

No gear is engaged. Releasing the brakes
N
The gearbox is a 7-speed, dual clutch will allow the vehicle to move freely, e.g.
Seamless Shift Gearbox that can be operated P for pushing or towing. For more information on
in automatic or manual mode. use of neutral for towing, see Towing for
Automatic mode is selected unless the driver recovery, page 198.
chooses manual mode, see Manual/Automatic
Reverse
mode, page 68. D
In normal circumstances, select reverse
R
In automatic mode, the Gearbox automatically gear when the vehicle is stationary. When
optimises the shift points to suit your style of carrying out parking manoeuvres that require
driving by selecting the most appropriate gear rapid changes from drive to reverse and back
R
depending on: again, it is possible to engage reverse or drive
 Powertrain control, page 74; at speeds up to 6mph (10 kph) whilst travelling
 Accelerator pedal position, page 67; in the opposite direction.
 Vehicle speed; NOTE: If reverse or drive is selected at
 Braking effort. speeds above 6 mph (10 kph), the
Press one of the gear position buttons
transmission will engage neutral, as a self
NOTE: Allow the engine and gearbox to (arrowed).
protection feature.
warm up before driving at high engine
speeds and high loads. Drive When reverse is selected and the brakes are
All seven forward gears are available. released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly
Avoid prolonged spinning of the rear wheels D
Gear changes will be automatic, unless without any throttle use making it useful for
when driving on slippery surfaces as this could
manual mode has been selected. parking manoeuvres.
damage the drive train.
When drive is selected and the brakes are
released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly
without any throttle use making it useful for
parking manoeuvres and for moving off in
queuing traffic.
66
DRIVING CONTROLS
Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the
Seamless Shift Gearbox changes gear.
N With light accelerator pedal use, upshifts are
9 made at lower engine speeds. With firmer
accelerator pedal use, upshifts are made at
CRUISE OIL higher engine speeds.
70
WATER
HANDLING
NORMAL
FUEL
Kickdown
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
Kickdown is designed to achieve immediate
acceleration.
Depress the accelerator pedal fully beyond the
pressure point, a click will be felt through the
The gear (manual mode) or the gear position pedal. The gearbox will downshift immediately
(automatic mode) selected will be shown in the to the lowest appropriate gear, and maximum
instrument panel. acceleration will follow. Once the pedal
pressure is released, kickdown will cease and
normal gear changes will resume.
NOTE: Moderate accelerator pedal
pressure may also cause the gearbox to
downshift, depending on vehicle speed.
67
DRIVING CONTROLS
Manual/Automatic mode
START M 3
9
ENGINE
STOP
S S
2
N
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
13:59 CRUISE OIL
70
ACTIVE
WATER
HANDLING
NORMAL
1 POWERTRAIN FUEL
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
SPORT
The gearbox mode indicator displays M. All When driving in manual mode, the gear
forward gear changes are made by operating position indicator will change from orange to
Press the ACTIVE button (1) to switch on the the gearshift paddles, see Gearshift paddles, red to indicate that an upshift is required.
active dynamics panel. page 69.
The halo around the ACTIVE button will come
on. When selecting the different drive modes,
their respective button will become illuminated.
You can deactivate your drive mode selection
at anytime by pressing the ACTIVE button
again. Press the MANUAL button (2) to select
manual mode.
68
DRIVING CONTROLS
Press the MANUAL button again to revert to Gearshift paddles As an alternative, upshifts can be made by
automatic mode. pushing the left-hand paddle away from you
and downshifts can be made by pushing the
right-hand paddle away from you.
4
5
6
7
8
The gearshift paddles operate irrespective of
A N the handling and powertrain program selected,
A
3 9
ABS
13:59
0
and there is no need to release the accelerator
CRUISE OIL
2 KPH
70
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
pedal to change gear.

WARNING: For safety, in manual mode
13:59 only, the vehicle will monitor engine
speed and may perform an automatic gear
change if necessary.
WARNING: Do not change down for
additional engine braking on a slippery
S
surface.
N
To upshift, pull the right-hand paddle towards
The gearbox mode indicator displays A. All you. To downshift pull the left-hand paddle
gear changes occur automatically, but if a towards you. The current gear position appears
gearshift paddle is operated the gearbox will in the gear position display, see Gear position
adopt a temporary manual mode. This mode indicator, page 126.
will remain active for as long as the driver
NOTE: The single-piece paddle and
continues to make manual gear changes, each central pivot enables upshifts and
within an eight second period. The gearbox
downshifts to be made using either paddle.
mode indicator displays A/M, see Gearbox
mode indicator, page 122.
NOTE: As soon as an eight second period
has elapsed without a manual gear
change being made, the gearbox will revert to
automatic mode.
69
DRIVING CONTROLS
NOTE: If operating the paddles in Pre-cog

automatic mode, the gearbox will revert to WARNING: Do not allow this feature to
automatic changes if an eight second period distract you from the prevailing road
elapses without a gear change being made. and traffic conditions.
To immediately shift to the lowest possible gear It is possible to pre-select the next gear change
while the vehicle is moving, select a downshift using the 'pre-cog' feature, to enable a faster
and hold the paddle. gear change. 'Pre-cog' (or 'pre-cognition')
When the vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 means 'foreknowledge'.
kph) or the vehicle is stationary with a gear The paddles have two switching points. Pull
selected, select a downshift and hold the and hold the appropriate paddle to the first
paddle to select neutral. point, this informs the gearbox of an impending
gear change. The gearbox then prepares for
that change by pre-selecting the next gear.
When the change is required, pull the paddle
fully and the gear change will be performed
almost instantaneously.
70
DRIVING CONTROLS
HANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
Active dynamics panel

Active dynamics control Active button

The active dynamics panel contains the
The handling and powertrain control switches, following controls, and will only function with
on the active dynamics panel, allow the driver the engine running or the ignition switched on.
to change the handling and performance START
characteristics of the vehicle. ENGINE

STOP
4
S S
N
T
T
START AERO MANUAL
ENGINE
STOP
S S
3 5 ACTIVE
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
ACTIVE
A E
2
1
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
6
P
Pressing the ACTIVE button (arrowed)

activates the handling and powertrain controls.
1. Winter mode, page 75 The ACTIVE button and handling and
powertrain switches will illuminate.
2. Active button, page 71
3. Handling control, page 72 NOTE: When the ignition is switched off,
the controls on the active dynamics panel
4. STOP/START button
will also switch off. The handling and
5. Powertrain control, page 74 powertrain control settings will be remembered
6. Launch control, page 76 but it will be necessary to press the ACTIVE
button again to operate the controls when the
ignition is next switched on.
71
DRIVING CONTROLS
Selecting a setting
Handling control
The handling control switch affects the START
ENGINE
following vehicle characteristics: STOP
START S S
 Roll stiffness ENGINE
N
T
T
STOP
AERO MANUAL
 Adaptive damping S S
N
T
T
 ESC settings
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
 Steering response ACTIVE

WINTER LAUNCH
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
2. Rotate the handling control (arrowed) to

select one of the following settings.
1. Press the ACTIVE button (arrowed) to
switch on the active dynamics panel.
72
DRIVING CONTROLS
Settings NOTE: If all the following conditions are Proactive chassis control
not met when the selection is made, the The Proactive chassis control system features
N Normal Suspension at its softest mode will not be implemented until they are adjustable roll control using hydraulically
setting, offers a compliant ride met. interconnected dampers, in place of the typical
while maintaining good body
 engine running with no fault conditions mechanical anti-roll bars. Each handling mode
control through corners. adjusts the settings of the dampers to offer high
existing;
levels of roll control, grip, traction and a unique
S Sport Suspension is stiffer, giving a  no vehicle dynamic or stability interventions
firmer ride coupled with combination of ride comfort and handling.
activated;
enhanced handling  vehicle speed below 114 mph (190 kph);
characteristics.
 steering wheel in straight ahead position,
T Track The suspension is at its stiffest, and not being turned, if the car is moving.
giving almost race car handling When the active dynamics panel is off, the
and ride characteristics. Handling display in the right-hand instrument
The Electronic Stability Control display will show Normal, see Handling and
warning light is permanently powertrain display, page 127.
illuminated.
NOTE: In Track handling mode, the
The mode selected will remain active, until the Electronic Stability Control system is still
selection is changed, or the ignition is switched in operation. For further information, see
off. Electronic Stability Control, page 80.
73
DRIVING CONTROLS
Settings
Powertrain control
Selecting a setting N Normal Gear changes are configured to
START
ENGINE
STOP
offer the optimum economy
S S without sacrificing the vehicle's
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL inherent performance.
START
ENGINE
STOP
ACTIVE
S Sport Gear changes will occur at a
S S
higher engine speed and with a
N
N
T
T
WINTER LAUNCH
AERO MANUAL
reduced shift duration.
ACTIVE T Track Gear change strategy is at its
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
sharpest, changes occur
P instantly, according to throttle
response.
2. Rotate the powertrain control (arrowed) to The different gear change strategies outlined
P
select one of the following settings. above are only relevant with automatic mode
selected.
1. Press the ACTIVE button (arrowed) to The mode selected will remain active, until the
switch on the active dynamics panel. selection is changed, or the ignition is switched
off.
When the active dynamics panel is off, the
Powertrain display in the right-hand instrument
display will show Normal, see Handling and
powertrain display, page 127.
74
DRIVING CONTROLS
3. Winter mode overrides both handling and

Winter mode powertrain controls. In winter mode, the roll
Selecting Winter mode START
stiffness, adaptive damping and Electronic
ENGINE
STOP Stability Control settings are changed to
S S
give the maximum assistance to the driver
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
in slippery conditions. The engine speed,
START
ENGINE
STOP
gearshift points and shift speed are also
ACTIVE
A
S S
optimised for the slippery conditions.
N
N
T
T
WINTER LAUNCH
AERO MANUAL
4. For more information, see Winter driving,
page 99.
ACTIVE
5. To switch off, press the WINTER button

ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
again, alternatively switch off the ignition.
P
P
2. Press the WINTER button (arrowed), the
button will illuminate and WINTER will
appear in the Powertrain and Handling
display.
1. Press the ACTIVE button (arrowed) to
75
DRIVING CONTROLS
NOTE: If there is a fault or the launch

Launch control procedure has not been followed correctly,
Launch control is designed to offer the a warning message Launch mode unavailable - START
maximum acceleration from a standing start. see Owners Manual will be shown in the left- ENGINE
STOP
hand display. Repeat the launch procedure, S S
WARNING: Before initiating launch
N
T
T
ensuring that it is followed correctly. If the AERO MANUAL
control, ensure that the prevailing road

warning message remains, contact a McLaren
and traffic conditions are suitable for ACTIVE
Dealer.
performing maximum acceleration ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
manoeuvres. 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left

foot and select first gear.
NOTE: Launch control can be operated in
either automatic or manual modes and
any handling or powertrain mode, but only P
when the active dynamics panel is activated.

NOTE: The launch sequence can be
deactivated at any point by carrying out 2. Press the ACTIVE button (arrowed) to
any of the following actions: switch on the active dynamics panel.
 applying the parking brake;
 pressing the ACTIVE button to switch off
the vehicle dynamics panel;
 or pressing the launch button to switch off
launch control
76
DRIVING CONTROLS
4. With your left foot remaining on the brake 6. Launch control will operate until aborted.
pedal, press and hold the accelerator pedal
NOTE: Whilst in launch control, the
down fully with your right foot, the engine
START vehicle will carry out automatic gear
ENGINE
STOP speed will increase to 3000 rpm.
shifts, and optimise traction. It will continue
S S
NOTE: To abort launch control release to do so until launch control is aborted. To

N
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
the brake pedal before pressing the abort launch control, release the
ACTIVE
E
accelerator pedal or wait for approximately accelerator pedal, apply the brake, or
60 seconds until launch control is operate one of the gearshift paddles.
WINTER LAUNCH
deactivated.
5. Release the brake pedal with your left foot
and the launch control system will perform a
P
launch start to give maximum acceleration
NOTE: To abort launch control release
the accelerator pedal or wait for
3. Press the LAUNCH button (arrowed). approximately 5-10 seconds until launch
control is deactivated. If the launch is
NOTE: L will flash in the gearbox
aborted, release the accelerator pedal and
mode indicator, see Manual/Automatic
then press again to drive away.
mode, page 68.
77
DRIVING CONTROLS
NOTE: In winter conditions, the maximum If the Anti-lock Braking System operates during
General effect of the Anti-lock Braking System, braking, the warning light flashes, and the
This section contains information about the Brake Assist System and Electronic Stability brake pedal pulses as this happens.
following safety systems: Control can only be achieved if you use winter When the Anti-lock Braking System is
tyres, with snow chains where they are
 Anti-lock Braking System activated, maintain the force on the brake pedal
necessary. until the braking situation is over.
 Brake Assist System
 Brake disc wiping WARNING: Always adapt your driving
 Hill hold Anti-lock Braking System style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain sufficient
 Brake-steer The Anti-lock Braking System prevents the
distance from other road users and objects
 Electronic brake pre-fill wheels from locking when you brake. This
on the road.
 Electronic Stability Control allows the vehicle to be steered during braking
manoeuvres.
 Airbrake
WARNING: The risk of an accident The Anti-lock Braking System works from a
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 kph)
increases when driving quickly,
upwards, regardless of road surface conditions.
especially when cornering, on wet and icy
roads. Always maintain a safe distance to It works on slippery surfaces, even when you
brake gently.
the vehicle in front.
The driving safety systems described in this WARNING: Do not depress the brake
pedal repeatedly in quick succession
section are unable to override the laws of
(pumping). Depress the brake pedal firmly
physics.
and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal
Always adapt your driving style to suit the reduces the braking effect.
road and weather conditions and maintain a
sufficient distance from other road users
and objects on the road.
78
DRIVING CONTROLS
Anti-lock Braking System status light

Brake Assist System Brake disc wiping
ABS
If there is a malfunction with the system,
the status light will illuminate. Do not drive Brake Assist System operates in emergency Brake disc wiping operates automatically when
your vehicle, contact a McLaren Dealer as soon braking situations. If you depress the brake the windscreen wiper is switched on. It
as possible. pedal quickly, the Brake Assist System prevents moisture build up on the brake discs
automatically increases the force applied to the during periods of heavy rain, improving braking
WARNING: If the Anti-lock Braking
brakes and thus shortens the stopping performance.
System malfunctions, Brake Assist
distance.
System and Electronic Stability Control are
also deactivated. Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly until
Hill hold control
the emergency situation is over, the Anti-lock
If the Anti-lock Braking System If the foot brake is applied to hold the vehicle on
Braking System prevents the wheels from
malfunctions, the wheels could lock when a hill, this function will continue to apply the
locking.
you brake. This may increase the stopping brakes for two seconds after the pedal is
distance and impair your ability to steer. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
released to assist a smooth start.
will work as normal. Brake Assist System is
deactivated.
WARNING: If the Brake Assist System
malfunctions, the brakes will still
operate. However, the braking force is not
automatically boosted and this may
increase the stopping distance.
79
DRIVING CONTROLS
Electronic Stability Control operation is

Brake-steer Electronic brake pre-fill indicated by the warning light flashing.
Brake steer offers the benefits of a torque If the accelerator pedal is suddenly released, NOTE: The Electronic Stability Control
vectoring differential, but is integrated into the the electronic brake pre-fill function warning light is permanently illuminated
braking system reducing weight and providing immediately brings the brake pads into contact when Track mode is selected on the Handling
excellent speed of response. with the discs, ensuring rapid braking. Control.
If the system detects that the car is starting to WARNING: If the Electronic Stability
understeer through a corner, the inside rear
Electronic Stability Control Control warning light flashes, do not
brake is gently applied. This helps to increase deactivate Electronic Stability Control.
the yaw rate of the car, making the car feel Electronic Stability Control monitors driving
Adapt your driving style to suit road and
more resistant to understeer. The lateral ‘g’ stability and traction between the tyres and the
traffic conditions.
force is also increased giving better handling road surface.
characteristics. Electronic Stability Control cannot reduce
Electronic Stability Control detects when a
the risk of an accident if you drive too fast.
If the driver uses too much throttle exiting a wheel starts to spin or the vehicle starts to skid
Electronic Stability Control is unable to
corner, the inside rear wheel increases speed, and stabilises the vehicle by braking individual
override the laws of physics.
which without brake steer could cause the car wheels, and/or limiting the engine power
to become unstable. In this situation, brake output. This also assists when pulling away on NOTE: Electronic Stability Control only
steer will again gently apply the brake on the wet or slippery road surfaces and stabilises the functions properly if wheels with the
inside rear wheel, thereby restoring traction vehicle when braking. recommended specification tyres are used.
and stability. Electronic Stability Control is activated
automatically as soon as the engine is running.
80
DRIVING CONTROLS
Traction control system Deactivating Electronic Stability Control

The traction control system is an integral part of WARNING: When Electronic Stability
Electronic Stability Control. Control is deactivated, the risk of the START
ENGINE
vehicle skidding is increased. Adapt your STOP
The traction control system reduces engine

driving style to suit road and traffic S S
torque to prevent the wheels from spinning. If
N
T
T
additional intervention is required to stop the conditions. AERO MANUAL
wheels from spinning, the vehicle will apply the NOTE: When you deactivate Electronic ACTIVE
rear brakes individually. The traction control Stability Control, the following conditions ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
system brakes individual drive wheels to result:

prevent them from spinning. This means that
 the 'ESC OFF' warning light illuminates;
you can accelerate on slippery surfaces.
 Electronic Stability Control no longer
WARNING: The traction control system improves driving stability; P
cannot reduce the risk of an accident if  the engine's torque is no longer limited and
you drive too fast. The traction control
the drive wheels could spin;
system is unable to override the laws of 3. Press and hold the ACTIVE button
physics.
 the anti-lock braking system remains
(arrowed) on the active dynamics panel for
activated.
5 seconds, a warning message will be
1. Ensure the vehicle is stationary, with the displayed in the left-hand display 'Confirm
engine running and the brake pedal ESC Off'.
depressed.
2. Track powertrain and handling modes
should be selected, but the dynamics panel
should not be switched on, see Handling
control, page 72.
81
DRIVING CONTROLS
Reactivating Electronic Stability Control NOTE: Electronic Stability Control is

automatically reactivated when the
START
ignition is next switched off and on again.
ENGINE
STOP
S S START
ENGINE
N
N
T
T
STOP
AERO MANUAL
S S
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
ACTIVE
ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
4. To confirm the selection, press and hold the

AERO and MANUAL buttons (arrowed)
Perform any of the following to reactivate
together for 5 seconds. Electronic Stability Control:
5. The Electronic Stability Control OFF
warning light illuminates and a confirmation  Press the ACTIVE button (arrowed) on the
active dynamics panel, or,
message appears in the left-hand display.
 Change the setting on either the handling or
powertrain control, or,
 Switch on cruise control, or,
 Switch the ignition off and then switch on
again.
The Electronic Stability Control OFF warning
light in the instrument cluster goes out, and
Electronic Stability Control is reactivated.
82
DRIVING CONTROLS
Self-test
Airbrake
3 After each full ignition cycle, the first time the
WARNING: The driver is responsible engine is started and at speeds above 9 mph
for ensuring that no persons, or any 2 (15 kph), the airbrake self-tests, rising to the
part of their body can be trapped during downforce position and then returning slowly to
airbrake movement. 1 its initial position.
The airbrake is located at the rear of your WARNING: If the airbrake fails the self-
McLaren and has three operating positions, as test, a message will appear in the left-
described below, and a self-test facility that hand display. Contact a McLaren Dealer as
initiates after every full ignition on/off cycle. soon as convenient.
NOTE: The airbrake uses hydraulic NOTE: If the engine has been stopped
pressure and will only operate with the with the airbrake in the downforce
engine running. position, the self-test procedure will be
NOTE: The airbrake system is reversed, i.e. the airbrake will lower fully then
automatically deactivated at temperatures 1. Normal driving position raise to the driver selected downforce position.
below -4°C (24°F) or at engine speeds below 2. Downforce position
Normal driving position mode
500 rpm. A warning message will appear on the 3. Rapid braking position
instrument cluster if operation of the airbrake is This is the default position with the active
selected. The airbrake system will become dynamics panel switched off and is used for
active when the ambient temperature rises normal driving conditions.
above -4°C (24°F). or engine speed rises
above 500 rpm.
83
DRIVING CONTROLS
Downforce position Lowering the airbrake - vehicle moving

In this position, the airbrake is raised to If the car is travelling at speeds above 9 mph
increase rear downforce. This position START
(15 kph), press the AERO button, and the
ENGINE
enhances vehicle stability with increased STOP
airbrake will lower to the normal driving
aerodynamic drag. The airbrake can be raised S S
position.
N
T
T
at any vehicle speed. AERO MANUAL
WARNING: Before deactivating the

ACTIVE downforce position, check the airbrake
WINTER LAUNCH
for any objects which may obstruct
START
movement, e.g. branches or leaves, and
ENGINE
STOP remove them or the airbrake may no longer
S S
function correctly. The driver is responsible
N
N
T
AERO MANUAL
for ensuring no person or object can be
P
trapped during airbrake movement.

ACTIVE
NOTE: The airbrake will only lower if the

ER
R
WINTER LAUNCH
LA
L
2. Press the AERO button (arrowed). The speed of the vehicle meets the following
airbrake rises and locks in the downforce criteria.
position. When cornering, the vehicle speed must be
P
between 9 mph (15 kph) and 75 mph (120 kph).
When travelling in a straight line, the vehicle
speed must be between 9 mph (15 kph) and
1. Press the ACTIVE button (arrowed) to 155 mph (250 kph).
This is to reduce the risk of any object being
trapped.
84
DRIVING CONTROLS
Lowering the airbrake - vehicle stationary Rapid braking position

If the car is being parked and the airbrake is still During hard braking at speeds above 60 mph
deployed, press and hold the AERO button for (95 kph), the airbrake automatically rises to the
5 seconds, and the airbrake will start to lower. fully deployed position to provide maximum
Keep the button pressed until the airbrake is braking assistance.
fully lowered, remaining alert to any potential Once the pressure on the brake pedal is
obstructions.
released, the airbrake will return to its previous
WARNING: Before lowering, check the position - either the driver selected downforce
airbrake for any objects which may position or the normal driving position.
obstruct movement, e.g. branches or
WARNING: When activated by hard
leaves, and remove them or the airbrake braking, the airbrake will temporarily
may no longer function correctly. The driver
block the view through the interior mirror. In
is responsible for ensuring no person or
this case, monitor the traffic behind you
object can be trapped during airbrake through the exterior mirrors.
movement.
NOTE: The airbrake will lower just before
NOTE: If the AERO button is released the vehicle comes to a halt during hard
before the airbrake is fully retracted, it will
braking.
return to the previously selected position.
85
DRIVING CONTROLS
The system monitors the tyre pressures and Tyre Pressure Monitoring System operation
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System* temperatures in each wheel using sensors If a low tyre pressure is detected, the Tyre
Tyre pressure monitoring system overview located in each tyre valve and a receiver Pressure Monitoring System warning light
located within the vehicle. Communication will illuminate along with an associated error
between the sensors and the receiver is via message in the left-hand display.
Radio Frequency (RF) signals.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, check
TYRE PRESSURES 14.38 NOTE: The Tyre Pressure Monitoring your tyres and inflate them to the
EDU EDU
System can suffer interference if you are recommended pressure, see Tyre pressures,
operating radio transmitting equipment (e.g. page 189.
EDU EDU radio headphones, two-way radios) in or near
Navigate through the 'Vehicle Info' screen in
0&/
the vehicle.
the left-hand display to view the current tyre
pressures, see Vehicle info, page 117.
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System warns

you when the pressure drops or the
temperature increases above an acceptable
level in one or more of the tyres.
86
DRIVING CONTROLS
WARNING: The tyre pressures ENVIRONMENTAL: Under-inflated tyres

indicated in the left-hand display will reduce fuel efficiency and tyre tread life,
be more accurate than with a pressure and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
TYRE PRESSURES 14.38 gauge. The Tyre Pressure Monitoring braking characteristics.
EDU EDU System is not a substitute for manually
ENVIRONMENTAL: Check tyre pressures
checking tyre pressures or checking for
at least every 14 days.
wear and damage. The system only
provides a low tyre pressure warning and
does not re-inflate the tyres.
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
EDU EDU cannot alert you to damage to a tyre.
Regularly check the condition of your tyres.
WARNING: If low pressure warnings
occur frequently, have the tyres
The display shows the pressures of each of the checked at a McLaren Dealer. Driving on an
4 tyres. If the pressure figure appears in green, under-inflated tyre will causes the tyre to
no action is required. If it appears as red text, overheat and can lead to tyre failure.
inflate the associated tyre to the correct
pressure as soon as possible.
87
DRIVING CONTROLS
Tyre Temperature Monitoring System This shows the current temperature of each of
operation the 4 tyres. If the temperature figure appears in
If a high tyre temperature is detected, the Tyre green, no action is required. If it appears as red
Temperature Monitoring System will display an text, the safe operating temperature of the tyres
error message in the left-hand display. has been exceeded. Reduce speed or stop the
vehicle until the temperatures are at a safe
Navigate through the 'Vehicle Info' screen in
level, i.e. temperatures are displayed in green.
the left-hand display to view the current tyre
temperatures, see Vehicle info, page 117.
TEMPERATURES 14.38
r& r&
r& r&
88
DRIVING CONTROLS
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER (ASL)
ACTIVE SPEED LIMITER (ASL)
Setting an upper speed limit

WARNING: It is the driver's
responsibility to keep within road
speed limits. D
WARNING: The ASL feature may allow 9
the vehicle to exceed the upper speed
limit is certain situations, for example when LIM OIL
70
descending steep gradients. HANDLING
WATER
NORMAL
FUEL
NOTE: ASL can be activated when the car POWERTRAIN
SPORT
is stationary. The upper speed limit will be
set to a default speed of 20 mph (30 kph).
It is possible to use the ASL control to set an
upper speed limit.
3. Push the stalk up briefly to select the 4. The upper speed limit (arrowed) appears in
Selecting a speed desired ASL upper speed limit. the right-hand display.
1. Press the button (arrowed) on the end of
the cruise control stalk, to select ASL mode.
2. Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the
desired speed.
89
DRIVING CONTROLS
CRUISE CONTROL
CRUISE CONTROL
Overview
WARNING: Pay particular attention to
road and traffic conditions, when
cruise control is activated, and always 5
6
7
travel at a speed which is safe for the A

4 8
N
3 9
current conditions.
ABS
13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
Never use cruise control on winding or 20.0 C

0
AUTO
slippery roads or when visibility is poor, e.g.

in fog, heavy rain or snow. MONO
AUTO
Cruise control allows the driver to maintain a

constant speed without using the accelerator
pedal. This is useful on motorway journeys START
ENGINE
E
STOP
where a constant speed, can be maintained for S
long periods. All cruise control functions are operated by the

cruise control stalk, positioned on the right of
the steering column.
90
DRIVING CONTROLS
CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Always be aware that cruise

Using cruise control is engaged and do not override cruise
for extended periods. Releasing the
accelerator in these circumstances could
lead to the vehicle not decelerating as
anticipated.
D
9
CRUISE OIL
70
WATER
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT
Accelerate to the desired speed and push the

stalk up briefly, to activate cruise control. The
set speed (arrowed) will appear in the right-
hand display.
NOTE: Cruise control will only operate at
speeds in excess of 20 mph (30 kph).
Speed can be increased at any time by
pressing the accelerator pedal. Once the
accelerator pedal is released the vehicle will
return to the cruise speed.
91
DRIVING CONTROLS
CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control is also cancelled if the foot brake

Cancelling cruise control is pressed, if neutral is selected or if Active Increasing cruise speed
Speed Limiter is selected.
NOTE: Cruise control is cancelled
automatically if Electronic Stability Control
is operating or is switched off.
Briefly press the cruise control stalk away from  A brief press of the stalk upwards will
you. increase the vehicle speed in 1 mph (1 kph)
increments (depending on the units
Cruise control is cancelled. The indicator in the
selected, see Units, page 108);
instrument cluster extinguishes but the last
speed set remains stored.  or press and hold the stalk upwards until
the desired speed is reached, then release
NOTE: The last speed stored is cleared the stalk;
when you switch off the engine.
 or accelerate to the new desired speed and
push the stalk up.
92
DRIVING CONTROLS
CRUISE CONTROL
NOTE: If you decelerate using the cruise

Reducing cruise speed control stalk, the gearbox may shift down Resuming a stored speed
to increase the rate of deceleration. WARNING: Only resume the stored
Downshifting manually using the gear change speed if it is appropriate for the current
paddles will not disengage cruise control. road and traffic conditions. Sudden
acceleration could endanger yourself and
others.
 A brief press of the stalk downwards will

decrease the vehicle speed in 1 mph (1
kph) decrements (depending on the units
selected, see Units, page 108);
 or press and hold the stalk downwards, the
vehicle will decelerate, release the stalk Pull the cruise control stalk briefly towards you.
when the desired speed has been reached.
Cruise control will adjust the vehicle's speed to
the last speed stored.
93
DRIVING CONTROLS
RUNNING IN
After the 625 miles (1000 km) running in period, Brakes

RUNNING IN
Running in you may gradually use the vehicle's full New brakes require an initial bedding in period.
Observe the following running in instructions performance. Avoid heavy braking situations for the first 625
when the vehicle is new or if any of these NOTE: Failure to observe the engine and miles (1000 km).
components have been replaced. gearbox operating limits during the
running in period may lead to premature wear
Engine and gearbox
or damage to the transmission.
For the first 625 miles (1000 km):
NOTE: These running in instructions also
 drive at varying road and engine speeds;
apply for the first 625 miles (1000 km)
 do not drive faster than 150 mph (240 kph); after the engine or transmission has been
 do not use your vehicle on a race track; replaced.
 avoid heavy loads on the engine (driving at
ENVIRONMENTAL: This advice will assist
full throttle);
in improving fuel economy and should be
 avoid driving at engine speeds less than adopted as normal driving practice even after
2000 rpm; the running in period.
 avoid running at constant speed and load
for long periods;
 avoid using kickdown;
 do not downshift for additional engine
braking;
 avoid stopping the engine within 2 minutes
of high speed and high load running.
 avoid idling the engine for more than 10
minutes.
94
DRIVING CONTROLS
RUNNING IN
Normal/Road use Track use

 Allow the engine to warm up before driving NOTE: Do not use the vehicle on a track
at high engine speeds and high loads. Limit during the running in period.
engine speed to 5 000 rpm until the engine Before you use your vehicle on the track,
reaches full operating temperature;
consult a McLaren Dealer. McLaren
 Avoid stopping the engine within 2 minutes recommend that your vehicle is inspected
of high speed/high load running; before and after track use.
 Avoid idling the engine for more than 10
minutes.
95
DRIVING CONTROLS
REFUELLING
Filling on the forecourt 5. Do not continue to fill the tank after the
REFUELLING
Filling with fuel pump nozzle switches off.

1. Switch off the engine.
WARNING: Fuel is highly flammable. 6. Remove the nozzle.
Fire, naked flames, smoking and using 7. Close the fuel filler flap, you will hear the
a mobile telephone are prohibited when latch engage.
handling fuels. Switch off the engine before
refuelling.
WARNING: Fuel and fuel vapours can
damage your health. Do not inhale fuel
vapours or allow fuel to come into contact
with skin or clothing.
The fuel filler flap is located at the rear on the
left-hand side. It is locked or unlocked
automatically when the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
NOTE: Do not attempt to force the filler
flap open if the car is locked. You may
2. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap
damage the flap and its locking mechanism.
(arrowed), the latch will release.
NOTE: The fuel filler flap will remain 3. Open the flap.
locked if the engine is running.
NOTE: Your vehicle is not fitted with a
fuel filler cap.
4. Insert the nozzle into the fuel filler and
dispense fuel. For fuel recommendations,
see Recommended fuel, page 98.
96
DRIVING CONTROLS
REFUELLING
Filling with the fuel funnel 8. Remove the nozzle.

NOTE: The fuel funnel should only be 9. Remove the fuel funnel, clean thoroughly
used when filling the fuel tank from and store in the luggage compartment.
sources other than a forecourt fuel pump. 10. Close the fuel filler flap, you will hear the
R20
Psi
latch engage.
Bar
R19
35
Psi 2.4
Bar
1. Switch off the engine.

36
32 2.5
2.2 39
34 2.7
2.3
36
2.5
>270kph/165mph
4. Collect the fuel funnel from the luggage

compartment, see Fuel funnel, page 163.
5. Insert the fuel funnel fully into the filler neck.
6. Insert the nozzle into the fuel funnel and
dispense fuel. For fuel recommendations,
see Recommended fuel, page 98.
2. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap
(arrowed), the latch will release. 7. Do not overfill.
3. Open the flap. WARNING: Take care to avoid
spillages and overfilling. Ensure
NOTE: Your vehicle is not fitted with a
any spillages are cleaned immediately.
fuel filler cap.
97
DRIVING CONTROLS
REFUELLING
Recommended fuel
For maximum engine performance the use of
98 RON/88 MON unleaded petrol meeting
specification EN 228 is required.
In areas where 98 RON/88 MON is
unavailable, use unleaded premium grade
petrol with a minimum octane rating of 95
RON/85 MON, meeting specification EN 228.
NOTE: Information relating to the quality
of fuel being dispensed is displayed on the
filling pump.
NOTE: The likelihood of engine wear or
damage is increased if fuel does not meet
the requirements of EN 228 for unleaded petrol
or if fuel additives are used.
Damage caused by use of incorrect fuel is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
98
DRIVING CONTROLS
WINTER DRIVING
Winter tyres Consult a McLaren Dealer for advice and

WINTER DRIVING
Winter driving information regarding the maximum speed

Use winter tyres below 7°C (45°F) and on snow
It is recommended that you have your vehicle or ice-covered roads. The maximum effect of specified for the winter tyres fitted.Restrict the
inspected at a McLaren Dealer at the onset of the Anti-lock Braking System and Electronic maximum speed of the vehicle using the ASL
winter. This service includes the following: Stability Control systems is only achieved with system, see Setting an upper speed limit,
these tyres. page 89.
 checking the antifreeze/anti-corrosion
concentration; Use winter tyres of the same make and tread
 adding concentrated cleaning agent to the on all wheels to maintain safe handling
windscreen and headlamp cleaning system; characteristics.Change the tyre type in 'Vehicle
 checking the battery; Settings' in the left-hand display, see Tyre
Type, page 115.
 changing the tyres.
WARNING: Replace winter tyres with a
Select Winter mode on the active dynamics
tread depth of less than 4 mm
panel, when conditions make it necessary, see
immediately. They are not suitable for
Winter mode, page 75.
winter use because they do not provide
sufficient grip, and could cause an accident.
NOTE: A wheel change must be carried
out at a McLaren Dealer. The vehicle
could be damaged if it is jacked up incorrectly.
99
DRIVING CONTROLS
WINTER DRIVING
Snow chains
McLaren recommends that you only use snow
chains which have been approved for McLaren
vehicles. If you are intending to fit snow chains,
bear the following points in mind:
 Only ever fit snow chains to both rear
wheels.
 Comply with the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
NOTE: If snow chains are fitted on the
front wheels, they may come into contact
with the bodywork or axle components while
the vehicle is being driven. As a result, the tyre
or the vehicle could be damaged.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 30 mph (50 kph). Remove the snow chains
as soon as possible if you are no longer driving
on snow-covered roads.
100
INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Overview .......................................................................... 102
Tachometer ...................................................................... 102
Speedometer ................................................................... 102
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Overview .......................................................................... 103
Home screen.................................................................... 106
Settings ............................................................................ 107
Vehicle info ...................................................................... 117
Language ......................................................................... 120
Trip ................................................................................... 121
Time display ..................................................................... 122
Gearbox mode indicator................................................... 122
Messages......................................................................... 123
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
Gear position indicator ..................................................... 126
Display window ................................................................ 126
Handling and powertrain display ...................................... 127
Oil temperature ................................................................ 128
Water temperature ........................................................... 129
Fuel level.......................................................................... 130
101
INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Overview Tachometer Speedometer

The instruments are activated when the ignition
in switched on, see Switching on the ignition, 1
page 51.
6 6
WARNING: No messages will be 5 7 5 7
displayed if there is a malfunction in 4 8 4 8
the instruments and/or one of the displays. A N A N
The vehicle's handling characteristics may 3 9 3 9
be affected. Contact a McLaren Dealer 13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL 13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
immediately. HANDLING
NORMAL
WATER
HANDLING
NORMAL
WATER
1 POWERTRAIN
SPORT
FUEL
1 POWERTRAIN
SPORT
FUEL
The tachometer (1) is mounted centrally within The speedometer (2) is a digital display
the instrument cluster. The red band in the mounted within the tachometer.
display indicates the engine's maximum speed.
NOTE: The speedometer changes from
NOTE: Do not operate the engine at or mph to kph when the units are changed
near its maximum speed for a significant from miles to kilometres, see Units, page 108
length of time. The fuel supply is cut off to
protect the engine when the maximum speed is
reached.
102
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Overview
The left-hand display automatically presents
the information and warning messages to the
driver, as and when the computer determines it 5
6
7
is required. Serious faults are also stored in the A

4 8
N
3 9
display and presented every time the ignition is

ABS
13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
switched on. Additional engine related warning

messages will be displayed when the engine is 20.0 C
0
AUTO
switched on. These warnings messages will be

MONO
AUTO
repeated until the fault has been rectified.

The stored messages can be viewed at any
time when the ignition is on, see Error
messages, page 117. S
START
ENGINE
STOP
E
In addition to presenting vital information to the Navigation through the menu structure is
driver, the left-hand display also provides the achieved using the control stalk mounted on
facility to personalise some vehicle settings and the left of the steering column.
enables operation of the Media and Trip
features.
103
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
The following categories are available.
LANGUAGE 14.38
HOME 14.38
Language, page 120
Home screen,
page 106 TRIP 14.38
SETTINGS 14.38
Trip, page 121
Settings, page 107
VEHICLE INFO 14.38
Vehicle info, page 117
104
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
To navigate through a category

1. Move the control stalk up or down
(SCROLL + or -) to highlight your choice.
2. Pull the stalk towards you (FORWARD) to
enter your selection.
3. Then select the topic of interest from the
list, move the control stalk up or down
(SCROLL + or -) to highlight your choice.
4. Pull the stalk towards you (FORWARD) to
move through to the next menu in the
structure.
5. At the end of each structure there will be a
display of information or a screen where a
setting can be changed
6. When the function required is selected or a
setting is made, press OK on the end of the
control stalk to confirm.
A setting is only changed if the OK button is
pressed.
105
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Range Trip
Home screen
Range is the estimated distance until the This displays the distance travelled since the
To change the content and layout of the Home vehicle requires refuelling. trip meter was last reset.
screen, see Home screen, page 109
Temperature Journey trip
WARNING: Even if the temperature This displays the distance travelled during the
displayed is above freezing point, the current journey.
HOME 14.38 road surface may still be icy. You should
ODOMETER TEMPERATURE always adapt your driving style and speed
to suit the weather conditions.
PL r&
Temperature is the current outside
RANGE TRIP temperature. There is a short delay before a
change in outside temperature is displayed.
PL PL
When the outside air temperature falls below
3°C (37°F), the frost warning message will be
displayed and the temperature reading will
change colour after the message has been
displayed.
In addition to the time, the Home Screen When the outside temperature falls below 0°C
displays any four of the following five functions. (32°F), the ice warning will be displayed.
Odometer
The odometer displays the total distance the
vehicle has travelled
106
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Display setup
Settings
Overview
The following choices can be made from the
Settings screen. SETTINGS 14.38
 Display setup, page 107 'LVSOD\6HWXS
 Lighting, page 109 /LJKWLQJ
 Vehicle, page 110 9HKLFOH
 Defaults, page 116 'HIDXOWV
The following selections can be made from

Display setup.
 Units, page 108
 Time and Date, page 108
 Home screen, page 109
107
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Units The setting for your vehicle depends on the Time and Date
country or region where the vehicle was
purchased. The units can be changed
individually at any time.
DISPLAY SETUP 14.38 Press the OK button on the end of the control TIME & DATE 14.38
8QLWV stalk to confirm your selections. 7LPH6HWWLQJV
7LPH 'DWH NOTE: This feature also sets the units for 'DWH6HWWLQJV
+RPH6FUHHQ the trip computer.
On the Units screen you can set the following Set the Time before setting the Date.
units of measurement.
The time and date are both set manually.
Distance - select miles or km.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
Speed - select mph or kph. stalk to confirm your choice.
Temperature - select °C or °F. The time display can be set as 12 hour or
Pressure - select kpa, Bar or PSI. 24 hour format, and the date display can
be set as day followed by month or month
Fuel Consumption - select mpg, km/Litre or followed by day.
Litres/100 km.
Volume - select UK gallons, US gallons or
litres.
108
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Home screen The second selection is the duration of the time Lighting
out for return to the Home screen. Choose 5,
10, 30 or 60 seconds.
HOME SCREEN 14.38 stalk to confirm your choice. LIGHTING 14.38
'LVSOD\,WHPV ([WHUQDO/LJKWLQJ
7LPHRXWWR+RPH6FUHHQ ,QWHUQDO/LJKWLQJ
There are two choices available to you. Select External lighting, page 110, or Internal
lighting, page 110.
The first is to set four of the following five items,
on the screen, in the position of your choice.
 Odometer
 Range
 Temperature
 Trip since reset
 Journey trip
109
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
External lighting Internal lighting Vehicle

It is possible to make the following selections.
 Valet Mode, page 111
 Auto Door Lock, page 112
EXTERNAL LIGHTING 14.38 INTERNAL LIGHTING 14.38
 Auto Fold Mirrors, page 112
(QWU\/LJKWLQJ7LPH 6HW/LJKWLQJOHYHOV
 Auto Alarm, page 112
([LW/LJKWLQJ7LPH 6ZLWFK/LJKWLQJ
 Door Unlock, page 112
)RRWZHOO/LJKWLQJ
 Timed Crank, page 113
'RRU/LJKWLQJ
 Comfort Entry/Exit, page 113
&RXUWHV\/LJKWLQJ >21@
 Silent Lock, page 113
 Reverse Mirror Dip, page 113
 Tyre Type, page 115
 Wiper Modes, page 114
 Wiper Sensitivity, page 114
Two choices are available. There are the following choices to make.
1. Set the duration that external lights remain 1. Switch Lighting
on after the vehicle has been unlocked. 2. Footwell Lighting
2. Set the duration that external lights remain 3. Door Lighting
on after the vehicle has been locked.
4. Courtesy Lighting
Press the OK button on the end of the control A bar graph will appear. Move the control stalk
stalk to confirm your choice.
up or down (SCROLL + or -) to highlight your
choice
110
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Valet Mode When Disable Valet Mode is selected, the PIN

must be entered again, before the mode is
disabled.
VALET MODE 14.38
VALET MODE 14.38 stalk to confirm your choice.
(QWHU9DOHW3,1
9$/(702'(21
'LVDEOH9DOHW0RGH
Change Valet PIN
For a 5 second period after entering Valet

Mode, the PIN can be changed. Select Change
To enter the PIN, press the control stalk up or
down until the first digit appears in the display, Valet PIN and enter a 4 digit PIN of your choice.
then press the OK button on the end of the With Valet Mode on, the luggage compartment
control stalk to confirm your choice. remains locked, and a confirmation message
appears in the left-hand display.
Repeat the process to enter the full PIN.
The default PIN will be set to 0000. You should
change this PIN at the earliest opportunity.
111
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Auto Door Lock Auto Fold Mirrors Door Unlock

When you receive the vehicle, Auto door lock Switch Auto Fold Mirrors 'ON' or 'OFF'. When Select DRIVERS or GLOBAL. When DRIVERS
will be set to on. 'ON' is selected the exterior mirrors will fold as is selected, only the driver's door will unlock or
the door is closed and unfold when the door is lock when an unlock or lock request is made.
The vehicle doors will automatically lock as the
opened. If 'OFF' is selected, the mirrors will With GLOBAL selected, both doors will unlock
vehicle moves off.
remain in their driving position. or lock when an unlock or lock request is made.
Switch Auto Door Lock off, and the doors
Press the OK button on the end of the control Press the OK button on the end of the control
remain unlocked after moving off, unless, they
are locked manually. stalk to confirm your choice. stalk to confirm your choice.
Press the OK button on the end of the control Auto Alarm

stalk to confirm your choice. With Auto Alarm selected, the alarm will arm
automatically if the vehicle is left unlocked but
all doors and covers are fully closed.
112
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Timed Crank Silent Lock Reverse Mirror Dip

With timed crank OFF, press and hold the Switch silent lock 'ON' or 'OFF'. When 'ON' is
STOP/START button until the engine starts. selected the direction indicators are disabled
when locking or unlocking using the keyless
With timed crank ON, a single press of the
STOP/START button will cause the engine to
entry system. MIRROR DIP 14.38
crank until it starts. If 'OFF' is selected, the direction indicators 2))
Press the OK button on the end of the control always flash when the car is locked or %27+
unlocked, irrespective of the method used.
stalk to confirm your choice. 3$66(1*(5
All other lock and unlock features remain
Comfort Entry/Exit active.
When comfort entry/exit is ON, the driver's seat
will move fully rearwards and to its lowest
position when the ignition is off and the driver's
door is opened.
When comfort entry/exit is OFF, the driver's
seat will remain in position at all times. Select 'OFF', 'BOTH' or 'PASSENGER'.
Press the OK button on the end of the control 'OFF' - no mirror dip will occur when reverse is
stalk to confirm your choice. engaged.
'BOTH' - both mirrors will dip when reverse is
engaged.
'PASSENGER' - passenger side mirror will dip
when reverse is engaged.
113
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
To set the amount the mirrors will dip when Wiper Modes Wiper Sensitivity
reverse is selected: Select either AUTOMATIC or TIMED.
1. Select 'BOTH' or 'PASSENGER' in the With AUTOMATIC selected, wiper operation in
mirror dip section of the cluster. the Auto position will be controlled by the rain
2. Depress brake and select reverse gear. sensor.
WIPER SENSITIVITY 14.38
3. Adjust mirror(s) to desired position, see With TIMED selected, wiper operation in the
Adjusting mirrors, page 40. Auto position will be an intermittent wipe. To set
4. Take vehicle out of reverse. the time delay for intermittent wipe, see Wiper
Sensitivity, page 114
The next time reverse is selected, the vehicle
will automatically move the mirror/mirrors to the Press the OK button on the end of the control
previously set offset from the normal position. If stalk to confirm your choice.
you change the position of the mirror/mirrors in
the normal position, you will have to reset your
reverse dip position using the above process.
A bar graph will appear showing current wiper

sensitivity setting move the control stalk up or
down (SCROLL + or -) to achieve your
preferred setting for the wiper operation. The
selection on this screen will apply for both rain
sensor level and intermittent wipe time delay.
114
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Tyre Type
TYRE TYPE 14.38

5:LQWHU
5&RUVD
53]HUR
The display will show all the possible tyre types

available. Select the tyres fitted to your vehicle.
115
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Defaults
DEFAULTS 14.38
5HVWRUH'HIDXOW6HWWLQJV
3UHVV2.WRDFFHSW
Select Restore Default Settings then press the

OK button on the end of the control stalk to
confirm that you wish to reset to the default
settings
116
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Service interval Error messages

Vehicle info
Overview
SERVICE INTERVAL 14.38 ERROR MESSAGES 14.38

VEHICLE INFO 14.38 6HUYLFH'XH,Q
6HUYLFH,QWHUYDO
GD\V25.P 1R(UURU0HVVDJHV
(UURU0HVVDJHV
7\UH3UHVVXUHV ZKLFKHYHULVVRRQHU
7\UH7HPSHUDWXUHV
2LO6WDWXV
%DWWHU\6WDWXV
9,1
At approximately 30 days or 1000 km (625 If no error messages have been logged, the
miles) before a service, the above display display will confirm this.
The following choices can be made from the appears.
If any errors have been logged, the screen will
Vehicle info screen. The message will then appear every time the display Error Messages with arrows to scroll
 Service interval, page 117 ignition is switched on, with the time/distance through the messages.
 Error messages, page 117 figures reducing. Once the service has been
carried out, the display will be reset by a
 Tyre pressure monitoring, page 118
McLaren Dealer.
 Tyre temperature monitoring, page 118
If a service becomes overdue, the display will
 Oil status, page 118
show the distance it is overdue by.
 Battery status, page 119
 Vehicle identification, page 119
117
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre temperature monitoring Oil status
TYRE PRESSURES 14.38 TEMPERATURES 14.38 OIL STATUS 14.38

EDU EDU r& r& 2LO7HPSHUDWXUH
°C
7LPH USP
VHFRQGV
2LO/HYHO
2.
EDU EDU r& r&
This shows the pressures of each of the 4 This shows the current temperature of each of Displays a bar showing the quantity and level of
tyres. If the pressure figure appears in green, the 4 tyres. If the temperature figure appears in oil, together with the oil temperature.
no action is required. If it appears as red text, green, no action is required. If it appears as red
To check the engine oil level, see Checking the
have the pressure rectified as soon as text, the safe operating temperature of the tyres engine oil, page 154
possible. has been exceeded. Reduce speed or stop the
vehicle until the temperatures are at a safe
Inspect the tyre(s) for any possible causes of
reduced tyre pressure. level, i.e. temperatures are displayed in green.
Inspect the tyre(s) for any possible causes of
increased tyre temperature.
118
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Battery status Vehicle identification
BATTERY STATUS 14.38 VIN 14.38
0&/
92%
Displays a battery symbol showing the level of Displays the vehicle identification number.
charge.
When battery charge is too low, a message
'Battery Fault' will also be displayed.
For more information, see Charging the battery,
page 165
119
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
The following choices are available. Press the OK button on the end of the control
Language stalk to confirm your choice.
 English UK
 English US If a language is not available on your vehicle,
NOT SUPPORTED will appear in the display.
 Arabic
LANGUAGE 14.38  Chinese
Consult a McLaren Dealer for further
assistance.
English (UK)  French
English (US)  German
 Italian
 Japanese
Français  Russian
Deutsch  Spanish
Use this screen to set your preferred language.
120
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Trip Journey trip

Trip
The trip can display the following Information.
 Trip, page 121
TRIP 14.38 JOURNEY TRIP 14.38
 Journey trip, page 121
',67$1&( &2168037,21 ',67$1&( &2168037,21
PLOHV PSJ PLOHV PSJ

7,0( $9(5$*(63((' 7,0( $9(5$*(63(('
K PSK K PSK
Displays distance, average fuel consumption Displays distance, average fuel consumption
and average speed since the last trip reset. and average speed for the current journey.
The hours displayed is the time that the engine The hours displayed is the time that the engine
has been running since the last trip reset. has been running in the current journey.
Press the OK button on the end of the control Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk for 2 seconds to reset the information stalk for 2 seconds to reset the information
back to zero. back to zero.
The information will also reset to zero when the
engine is switched off.
121
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Time display Gearbox mode indicator
A A
13:59 13:59
The clock (arrowed) appears in the top right- The gearbox mode indicator shows the current
hand corner of the left-hand display mode selected:
NOTE: The time can be displayed in a 12  Automatic A
hour or 24 hour format. The time and date  Manual M
are set manually, see Time and Date,
 Temporary manual A/M
page 108.
 Launch L
For more information, see Manual/Automatic
mode, page 68.
122
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Messages
The left-hand display may show messages that
refer you to the Owner Manual. The table below
indicates what you should do when one of
these messages is displayed.
Message Action
ESC OFF The ESC deactivation procedure has not been followed correctly. See Electronic Stability Control,
Invalid Operation page 80.
See Owners Manual
Airbrake Restricted  Raise the vehicle speed above 9 mph (15 kph) and press the AERO button
Low Vehicle Speed  or to lower the airbrake while the vehicle is travelling below 9 mph (15 kph) or is stationary, press
See Owners Manual the AERO button for 5 seconds, the airbrake will begin to lower. Hold the AERO button for a
further 3 seconds until the airbrake has lowered fully to the normal driving position.
Clutch Over Temperature The vehicle has been subject to extreme operating conditions. This may be caused by excessive hill
See Owners Manual starts, repeated hard acceleration, driving slowly up steep hills for extended periods. As a result, the
gearbox may limit engine torque.
Allow the engine to idle in neutral for a few minutes.
Launch Mode Unavailable The conditions to enable a Launch have not been met, see Launch control, page 76.
See Owners Manual
Immobiliser Failure Contact a McLaren Dealer immediately.

See Owners Manual
Use Emergency - Start Receptacle The key fob is not functioning correctly. To start the engine, see Starting the vehicle, page 179.
See Owners Manual
123
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Message Action
Low brake fluid level Top-up brake fluid, see Brake fluid, page 159
See Owners Manual
Low steering fluid level Top-up the power steering fluid, see Power steering fluid, page 158
See Owners Manual
Front left tyre fault Inspect wheels and tyres, see Inspecting wheels and tyres, page 187
See Owners Manual
Front right tyre fault Inspect wheels and tyres, see Inspecting wheels and tyres, page 187
See Owners Manual
Rear left tyre fault Inspect wheels and tyres, see Inspecting wheels and tyres, page 187
See Owners Manual
Rear right tyre fault Inspect wheels and tyres, see Inspecting wheels and tyres, page 187
See Owners Manual
Airbrake system temporarily unavailable See Airbrake, page 83

See Owners Manual
Winter mode unavailable See Winter mode, page 75

See Owners Manual
Launch mode aborted See Launch control, page 76

See Owners Manual
Battery low please charge See Charging the battery, page 165
See Owners Manual
124
INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND DISPLAY
Message Action
Key battery low See Replacing key fob battery, page 182
See Owners Manual
Low windscreen washer fluid Top-up windscreen washer fluid, see Windscreen and headlamp washers, page 160
See Owners Manual
Passenger seat obstructed move seat See Electric seats*, page 24

upwards
See Owners Manual
125
INSTRUMENTS
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
Gear position indicator Display window
N N 2
9 9
ABS ABS
CRUISE OIL CRUISE OIL
70 70
WATER P WATER
HANDLING HANDLING P
NORMAL NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P P
SPORT
The gear position indicator (1) shows the The display window (2) provides the driver with
current gear position selected; drive, neutral or visual confirmation of cruise control speed and
reverse. Electronic Stability Control status.
When driving in manual mode, the gear
position indicator will change from orange to
red to indicate that an upshift is required.
126
INSTRUMENTS
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
NOTE: If the ACTIVE button has not been

Handling and powertrain display pressed (active dynamics panel is off), the
Handling and Powertrain displays will both
show Normal.
N Additionally, if all conditions for a particular

mode are not met when the selection is made,
9
ABS
the mode will not be implemented until the
CRUISE OIL
conditions are met.
70
WATER P
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
Confirmation of the handling and powertrain

mode selected (3) is displayed. For more
information on the different settings that are
available, see Active dynamics control,
page 71.
127
INSTRUMENTS
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
High temperature is indicated if the bar turns

Oil temperature ORANGE and excessive temperature is
indicated by the bar turning RED.
If the gauge shows high temperature,
ORANGE, slow down until the temperature
N
drops to normal. If the temperature continues to
1 rise and the bar turns RED, a warning message
9 will appear in the left-hand display.
ABS
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and

CRUISE OIL
70 contact a McLaren Dealer immediately.

WATER P
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
The oil temperature is displayed in the form of a

coloured bar graph (1) on the right-hand side of
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is first started the bar will be
BLUE. As the engine warms up the colour will
change to GREY, indicating normal
temperature.
128
INSTRUMENTS
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
High temperature is indicated if the bar turns

Water temperature ORANGE and excessive temperature is
indicated by the bar turning RED.
If the gauge shows high temperature,
ORANGE, slow down until the temperature
N
drops to normal. If the temperature continues to
rise and the bar turns RED, a warning message
9 will appear in the left-hand display.
ABS 2
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
CRUISE OIL
70 contact a McLaren Dealer.

WATER P
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
The water temperature is displayed in the form

of a coloured bar graph (2) on the right-hand
side of the instrument cluster.
When the engine is first started the bar will be
BLUE. As the engine warms up the colour will
change to GREY, indicating normal
temperature.
129
INSTRUMENTS
RIGHT HAND DISPLAY
Fuel level
N
9
ABS
CRUISE OIL
70 3
WATER P
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN FUEL
SPORT P
The fuel level is displayed in the form of a

coloured bar graph (3) on the right-hand side of
the instrument cluster. The bar will usually be
GREY. When the bar turns RED there is
approximately 2.4 UK gallons (11 litres) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
130
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
WINDOWS Sun visors......................................................................... 148

Safety ............................................................................... 132 Stowage net ..................................................................... 148
Opening and closing ........................................................ 132 Stowage compartment ..................................................... 149
Cup holders ...................................................................... 150
AIR CONDITIONING
Owner documentation ...................................................... 150
Overview .......................................................................... 134
Accessory power sockets................................................. 151
Controls............................................................................ 134
Car cover.......................................................................... 151
AC button ......................................................................... 135
Modes of operation .......................................................... 135
Temperature control......................................................... 137
Blower speed control ....................................................... 138
Air distribution settings ..................................................... 139
Demisting/de-frosting ....................................................... 140
Air-recirculation mode ...................................................... 140
Heated rear screen .......................................................... 141
VEHICLE TRACKING
Overview .......................................................................... 142
Automatic Driver Recognition cards................................. 142
Remote Keypad ............................................................... 143
In the event of a theft ....................................................... 144
Disabling the Tracker system........................................... 145
Vehicle Tracking Centre................................................... 145
False alarms .................................................................... 146
False alarm policy ............................................................ 146
INTERIOR FEATURES
Interior lighting ................................................................. 147
Entry lighting .................................................................... 148
Exit lighting....................................................................... 148
131

WINDOWS
Switches for both windows are located on the

WINDOWS
Safety Opening and closing driver door console. A switch for the passenger
WARNING: Ensure that no-one can be WARNING: If the driver's window is window is located on the passenger door
trapped as you open or close the obstructed during the closing console.
windows. Do not rest any part of your body procedure, operate the switch again within
against the window. There is a risk of five seconds, and the window will close
becoming trapped by the movement of the without anti-entrapment protection. Ensure
window. If there is a risk of entrapment, stop that no-one can be trapped when you do
movement of the window. this.
1 2
1. Driver's window switch

2. Passenger's window switch
132

WINDOWS
Press switch (1) or (2). The window will open Resetting the windows Pull both switches upwards until the windows
for as long as the switch is pressed. The windows must be reset if the battery has are closed and hold them in this position for 5
been discharged or disconnected, or if the anti- seconds.
Pull switch (1) or (2). The window will close for
as long as the switch is pressed. trap feature has been activated. The windows are now reset.
To open or close a window fully, press or pull Ensure that both doors are closed and the If this does not resolve the issue, please
switch (1) or (2) fully and release. ignition is switched on. contact a McLaren Dealer immediately.
NOTE: To stop a window opening or Anti-trap protection
closing, press or pull the appropriate
Anti-trap protection will stop windows opening
switch.
or closing if an obstruction or resistance is
detected.
1 2
If the anti-trap protection is triggered, check the
window and the window aperture and remove
any obstruction, before operating the windows
again. In the event of an anti-trap event when
closing the door, see Closing a door, page 13.
Push switches (1) and (2) downwards until the

windows are open and hold them in this
position for 5 seconds.
133

AIR CONDITIONING
NOTE: The interior air temperature sensor

AIR CONDITIONING
Overview is located between the steering wheel and Controls

The system can be operated in automatic the centre console. Do not obstruct airflow to
mode or settings can be adjusted manually. this sensor or the performance of the air 20.00C
AUTO
20.00C
AUTO
conditioning system will be reduced.

The combination filter reduces the quantity of
dust and pollutants entering the car. NOTE: The vehicle will retain the current MONO AC AUTO
air conditioning settings when the ignition

WARNING: Follow the recommended
is switched off.
settings given for heating or cooling. If
the windows mist up, you may no longer be
able to observe road and traffic conditions A
13:59
3
4
2
5
6
7
0
8
KPH
9
N
CRUISE
70
OIL
ABS
WATER P
HANDLING
and could cause an accident.

NORMAL
1 POWERTRAIN
SPORT
FUEL
P
20.0 20.0 C
0
C
0
AUTO AUTO
NOTE: The air conditioning system

MONO
AC
AUTO
operates more effectively with the doors S

START
ENGINE
STOP
N
and windows closed. However, if the vehicle
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
has been standing in a hot environment for a P
long time, ventilate by opening the windows

briefly. The air conditioning system is operated using
controls located on the driver and passenger
door consoles. When MONO is selected, the
passenger can adjust the blower speed, and
the temperature on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
134

AIR CONDITIONING
Driver's air conditioning controls Passenger's air conditioning controls

Modes of operation
Automatic mode
20.00C 3 20.00C
AUTO AUTO In automatic mode, the air conditioning
1 AUTO
system maintains the set interior

4
temperature using a combination of differing
2 1
5 blower speeds, air recirculation and air
9 distribution.
MONO AC AUTO 6
To switch on automatic mode, press the AUTO
button.
8 7
2 The light on the button illuminates and the air
distribution, temperature and blower speed are
adjusted automatically on both sides of the
vehicle.
AUTO will appear on the display on driver and
1. Windscreen demist button 1. Temperature control
passenger door consoles.
2. Air recirculation button 2. Blower speed control
In AUTO mode, there is no need to adjust the
3. Temperature control
blower speed or air distribution, the system will
4. MONO button operate whichever controls it needs to maintain
AC button
5. Air conditioning (AC) button the set temperature. If necessary, the system
The air conditioning can be switched off at settings can be manually adjusted, see Manual
6. AUTO button AC
any time in any mode. Press the AC mode, page 136.

7. Blower speed control button. The light on the button extinguishes.
8. Air distribution buttons
To switch the air conditioning on, press the AC
9. Heated rear window button button again, the light on the button illuminates.
135

AIR CONDITIONING
Manual mode MONO mode button

To adjust the air temperature manually, see MONO
MONO mode allows the driver to transfer
Temperature control, page 137. their air temperature settings directly over
to the passenger air conditioning control panel
To adjust the blower speed manually, see
Blower speed control, page 138. Press the MONO button, the light on the button
will illuminate and all air temperature settings
When either the air temperature or blower
will be transferred over to the passenger air
speed is adjusted manually, the light on the
AUTO button will extinguish and the blower conditioning control panel. Any changes the
driver makes on their air conditioning control
speed will appear on the display on driver and
panel, will change automatically on the
passenger door consoles.
passengers air conditioning control panel.
If the passenger then adjusts any of the air
temperature settings on their air conditioning
control panel, MONO mode will be deactivated.
The MONO button light will then extinguish.
The driver can exit MONO mode at any time by
a single press of the MONO button. The MONO
button light will then extinguish.
136

AIR CONDITIONING
NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted

Temperature control in 1°C increments from 16°C to 28°C.
Change the temperature in small increments,
until the desired setting is achieved.
To set the temperature to maximum, rotate the
control clockwise until 'HI' is displayed. The air
conditioning adjusts the air temperature to the
highest setting, the blower speed is set to
maximum and air is directed to the footwells.
6
5 7
4 8
A
13:59
3
2
1
0
KPH
9
N
CRUISE
70
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
OIL
WATER
FUEL
ABS
P
To set the temperature to minimum, rotate the
20.0
0
AUTO
C
0
control anti-clockwise until 'LO' is displayed.
MONO
M NO
AC
AUTO
AUTO
The air conditioning sets the air temperature to
the lowest setting, the blower speed is set to
START
ENGINE
maximum and air is directed to the centre air
STOP
S S
vents.
N
N
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
The temperature set will appear on the displays

Rotate the control clockwise to increase the on the driver and passenger door consoles.
temperature, or anti-clockwise to decrease.
NOTE: With 'LO' selected, it is not
If in automatic mode, the light on the AUTO possible to switch off the air conditioning
button will extinguish. or switch on demist mode.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
mode.
137

AIR CONDITIONING
NOTE: When the engine is restarted from

Blower speed control hot, the blower operates at low speed.
This removes warm air from the vents, the
blower speed will then increase to the
requested setting.
Rotate the blower control clockwise to increase
or anti-clockwise to decrease blower speed.
If in automatic mode, the light on the AUTO
5
6
7
button will extinguish.
4 8
A N
3 9
The blower speed will appear on the displays

ABS
13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
1 POWERTRAIN
SPORT
FUEL
P
20.0
AUTO
C
0
on the driver and passenger door consoles.

MONO
M NO
AC
AUT
AUTO
UTO
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic

mode.
START
ENGINE
STOP
S S
N
N
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
NOTE: When the engine is first started,

the blower speed is limited and the air is
directed at the windscreen until the engine has
warmed up.
Blower speed is also limited when the ignition is
in the accessory position.
138

AIR CONDITIONING
All three buttons, a combination of any two or Dashboard air vents

Air distribution settings an individual button can be selected at any
time.
When an air distribution button is pressed, the
1
icon on the button will illuminate and the setting
will be displayed briefly on the control panel.
2
6
5 7
4 8
A N
3 9
3
ABS
13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
1 POWERTRAIN
SPORT
FUEL
P
20.0 C
0
AUTO
MONO
M NO
AC
AUT
AUTO
UTO
START
ENGINE
STOP
S S
N
N
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
Turn a quarter turn in either direction until the

The air distribution can be set using the air- vent is open or closed.
distribution controls.
Press button (1) to direct air to the windscreen,
press button (2) to direct air to the centre air
vents, press button (3) to direct air to the
footwell vents.
139

AIR CONDITIONING
NOTE: It is possible to manually reduce

Demisting/de-frosting the blower speed using either the driver or Air-recirculation mode
passenger blower speed control, see Blower
speed control, page 138.
NOTE: Air recirculation is inhibited when
demist mode is selected.
Press the demist button again to exit the demist
mode. The icon on the button extinguishes, and
5
6
7
the air temperature and blower speed return to 5
6
7
4 8 4 8
A
13:59
3
2
1
0
KPH
9
N
CRUISE
70
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
OIL
WATER
FUEL
ABS
P
their original settings. A
13:59
3
2
1
0
KPH
9
N
CRUISE
70
HANDLING
NORMAL
POWERTRAIN
SPORT
OIL
WATER
FUEL
ABS
20.0
0 C
0
20.0
0 C
0
AUTO AUTO
MONO
M NO MONO
M NO
AC AC
AUTO
AUTO AUTO
AUTO
START START
ENGINE ENGINE
STOP STOP
S S S S
N
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH WINTER LAUNCH
Press the demist button (arrowed). The icon on Select Air recirculation when unpleasant smells
the button illuminates, the demist symbol or fumes are entering the vehicle.
appears in the control panel display and the air
WARNING: Switch to air-recirculation
conditioning switches on if previously off. The
mode briefly if outside temperatures
blower will operate at full speed and the air are low. Be aware that the windows could
temperature will be set to 'HI'.
mist up, which may impair your visibility. As
a result, you could be distracted from road
and traffic conditions and cause an
accident.
140

AIR CONDITIONING
NOTE: Switch on the air conditioning to NOTE: Switching on the heated rear
prevent the windows misting. Heated rear screen screen also switches on the exterior mirror
heaters.
Press the air-recirculation button (arrowed), to
select air recirculation. The icon on the button The rear screen heating switches off
will illuminate. To switch off, press the air- automatically after a set time, depending on the
recirculation button again and the icon on the outside air temperature.
button will extinguish.
6
5 7
4 8
A N
3 9
ABS
13:59
2 0
KPH
CRUISE
70
OIL
WATER
HANDLING P
NORMAL
1 POWERTRAIN
SPORT
FUEL
P
20.0
0 C
0
AUTO
MONO
M NO
AC
AUTO
AUTO
START
ENGINE
STOP
S S
N
T
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
WINTER LAUNCH
WARNING: Remove any accumulated

ice or snow from the windows before
setting off. Impaired visibility could
endanger yourself and others.
Press the button (arrowed), to heat the rear
screen. The icon on the button will illuminate.
To switch off, press the button again and the
icon on the button will extinguish.
141

VEHICLE TRACKING*
VEHICLE TRACKING*
Overview Automatic Driver Recognition cards

This section provides an overview of the When the ignition is switched off, the Vehicle
Vehicle Tracking service. If you need further Tracking system will automatically arm itself. If
clarification, contact Vehicle Tracking Customer the vehicle is then moved (lifted, towed or
Service. driven) without the Automatic Driver
Recognition card present, a silent alert is
The tracking system is a subscription based immediately sent to the Vehicle Tracking
service which tracks vehicle movements in the Centre.
event of a theft, sabotage attempts, vehicle
break-in or GPS antenna tampering. NOTE: Store your Automatic Driver
Recognition card away from keys when
Depending on market specification, you have the vehicle is not in use to reduce the risk of the
been supplied with two unique Automatic Driver card being taken in the event of key theft.
Recognition cards, or two remote keypads.
Do not leave your Automatic Driver Recognition
NOTE: Each driver must carry an card or certificate of tracker installation in the
Automatic Driver Recognition card vehicle.
whenever they drive the vehicle. If a keypad
has been supplied, this must be used to enter a NOTE: Up to seven cards can be
code every time the car is to be driven. programmed to work with the system.
Replacement or additional Automatic Driver
Recognition cards are available from a
McLaren Dealer.
142

VEHICLE TRACKING*
Entering a code
Remote Keypad
Your keypad is used to enter and transmit a
code to the McLaren Tracking Service, in order
to activate your Tracker System.
Once you have received the code, sent to your
mobile phone, follow the procedure described.
1
2
3
You will need to enter this code every time that
4
you use your vehicle.
If you wish to add or remove a keypad, contact
your McLaren Dealer. The Tracker system can
recognise up to seven keypads
NOTE: Store your remote keypad away
from keys when the vehicle is not in use to
reduce the risk of the keypad being taken in the
event of key theft. 1. Press the centre button, the LED will start
flashing.
Do not leave your remote keypad or certificate
2. Enter the code supplied to your mobile
of tracker installation in the vehicle.
phone, and press the centre button again.
NOTE: Up to seven keypads can be
3. The LED will stop flashing once the code is
programmed to work with the system.
validated.
Replacement or additional keypads are
available from a McLaren Dealer. 4. The keypad is now activated.
NOTE: You will need to enter this code
every time that you use your vehicle.
143

VEHICLE TRACKING*
3. The Vehicle Tracking Centre will ask you to 5. When the Police secure the stolen vehicle,
In the event of a theft contact the Police to report the theft and call arrangements will have to be made with you
1. If you discover the vehicle has been stolen, back with a Police incident number. Receipt for the vehicle to be collected. The Police
call the Vehicle Tracking Centre in your of an alert does not constitute a confirmed may recover the vehicle to a secure
home country, theft, as the Police require your, or compound for further investigation.
or keyholder, verification of a theft. You may be liable for any recovery and
if your vehicle is supplied with an Automatic If you are abroad at the time of theft, the storage charges.
Driver Recognition card and the vehicle is Vehicle Tracking Centre will contact the
moved without this, the Vehicle Tracking Police in your home country for you to
Centre will initially send a text message to obtain a Police incident number.
you to verify the vehicle movement. In 4. The Vehicle Tracking Centre will then liaise
addition to this, the Vehicle Tracking Centre with the relevant local Police to recover
will attempt to contact you using your your vehicle.
mobile phone number then your home or In order to prevent your vehicle being
office number provided you supplied them moved following a theft, the Vehicle
at the time of vehicle collection. Tracking service may, under instruction
2. The Vehicle Tracking Centre will not contact from the Police, temporarily prevent the
the Police until they have spoken to you. vehicle's engine from restarting (market
Once you have confirmed the theft, they will dependant).
commence the vehicle recovery procedure.
144

VEHICLE TRACKING*
For Customer service issues, contact the

Disabling the Tracker system Vehicle Tracking Centre operators between 09:00 to 17:30, Monday to
There will be instances when you wish to If you car is stolen, contact the appropriate Friday.
disable your Tracker for specific periods of number from the table. NOTE: The cost of calls is calculated
time. according to the national tariff.
These will include visits to a McLaren Dealer or
Country Telephone
if the car is to be transported on a trailer, train
or ferry. UK +44 (0) 844 239 0035
You can contact the Vehicle Tracking Centre Germany +49 (0) 700 767 724 3887
and advise them that you wish the system to be
placed in either ‘Transport’ or ‘Garage’ mode. Italy +39 (0) 331 1620856
The operator will request the exact time that Spain +34 (0) 902 11 11 73
this should be implemented and also the
France +33 (0) 8 92 70 14 40
duration. This will ensure that the system is
only disabled for the minimum time necessary. Switzerland +41 (0) 22 710 28 79
Belgium +32 (0) 2 752 39 07
South Africa +27 (0) 800 132 323
The Vehicle Tracking Centres are operational

24 hours every day throughout the year (bank
holidays included).
145

VEHICLE TRACKING*
False alarms False alarm policy

To maintain the Vehicle Tracking service stolen Following an alert, the Vehicle Tracking Centre
vehicle recovery rates, customer support is will contact you to confirm the status of the
needed to keep false alarms to a minimum. vehicle. If the alert is a false alarm, this will be
recorded on your account, you may be charged
NOTE: Ensure that the vehicle battery
for excessive false alarms.
remains fully charged at all times, a
discharged battery may lead to a false alarm. All Automatic Driver Recognition card users will
be allowed up to 5 false alerts in a 12 month
A disconnected battery may also lead to a false
alarm. period.
NOTE: To avoid unnecessary alerts,
contact the Vehicle Tracking Centre to
inform them of any potential false alarms.
146

INTERIOR FEATURES
NOTE: Ensure that the interior lighting is The courtesy lighting extinguishes one minute
INTERIOR FEATURES
Interior lighting switched off when leaving the vehicle. after the doors have been closed or when the
To switch off the interior lighting, press touch ignition is switched on.
pad (3) again. The luggage compartment light illuminates
1
PA
when the luggage compartment is opened.
2 SSENGE
R AIR BA
G OF
F
2 Reading lights
2
Press touch pads (1) or (2) to switch on the

desired reading light.
For gradual reading illumination, press and
hold touch pad (1) or (2) until desired lighting is
3
achieved.
Press touch pads (1) or (2) again to switch off
the respective reading light.
Courtesy lighting
The interior of your McLaren is lit in the
1. Left-hand reading light on/off/gradual following areas:
touch pad
 the driver's and passenger's footwells,
2. Right-hand reading light on/off/gradual
when you open a door;
touch pad
 the centre console (illuminated by a light
3. Interior lighting on/off touch pad
within the interior mirror), if the ignition is
For full interior lighting, press the touch pad (3) on;
quickly.  the interior door handles, if the ignition is
on.
147

INTERIOR FEATURES
Entry lighting Sun visors Stowage net

Entry lighting improves visibility and security A stowage net is fitted on the bulkhead
when you approach the vehicle. between the seats for storing small items.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the headlamps WARNING: Do not use the stowage net
and tail lamps illuminate for a period of time or to transport any heavy, sharp-edged or
until the ignition is switched on. breakable objects. Occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around
To set the entry lighting duration, see Internal
during sharp braking, a sudden change of
lighting, page 110.
direction or an accident.
Exit lighting
Exit lighting improves visibility and security
when you leave the vehicle by illuminating the
headlamps and tail lamps for a period of time.
To set the exit lighting duration, see External
Fold the sun visors down to protect your eyes
lighting, page 110.
from bright sunlight as you are driving.
148

INTERIOR FEATURES
Stowage pocket
Stowage compartment
A pocket is fitted to the front edge of each seat
for storing small items.
RT
STA E
GIN
EENN STOP T
S
UAL
N
MAN
T
P
O
AER
H IVE
ACT
NCH
LAU
TER
WIN
P
The USB connector and a 3.5 mm auxiliary

socket are located in the stowage
A compartment (arrowed) is fitted in the centre compartment.
console for storing small items. NOTE: Always close the stowage
WARNING: The stowage compartment compartment when leaving the vehicle, or
must be closed when items are stored the interior motion sensor will not function.
in it. Occupants could be injured by objects NOTE: The area behind the seats is not
being thrown around during sharp braking, designed for storing luggage or any other
a sudden change of direction or an personal items.
accident.
149

INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holders Owner documentation

L
Your McLaren is equipped with the following

FUE
documents:
 Quick guide - which gives a brief overview
of the controls and instruments fitted to your
RT
STA NE
GI
EN STOP S T
McLaren
 Service and Warranty booklet - provides
AL
NU
N
MA
S T P
O
N
AER
H IVE
ACT
information on what to do and who to

NCH
LAU
TER
WIN
contact in the event of problems.

P
Utilise the two cup holders (arrowed) for safe

convenient storage of closed drink containers
when on a journey.
WARNING: Drinking while the car is
moving could cause you to become
distracted which could lead to an accident.
These documents are stored in a slot under the

dashboard on the passenger's side (arrowed).
150

INTERIOR FEATURES
Accessory power sockets Car cover

A car cover, suitable for use inside a garage,
can be purchased from a McLaren Dealer
McLaren recommends that the car is covered if
it is to be left in storage for periods over two
weeks. Clean the vehicle inside and out,
ensuring that it has fully dried, prior to fitting the
AUTO
STA
GIN
RT
E
EN STOP
S T
cover.
OFF
UAL
N
MAN
S T P
O
N
AER
H
ACT
WINT
IVE
ER
LAU
NCH
NOTE: Allow the engine to cool before

fitting the cover or the hot exhaust pipes
P
could cause damage to the cover.
MAX
MIN
Interior socket
The interior accessory socket (arrowed) is
Luggage compartment socket located inside the passenger compartment,
The accessory socket (arrowed), located behind the centre console.
in the luggage compartment, is the only NOTE: Do not connect the battery charger
one that can be used to connect the battery to the interior accessory socket.
charger
NOTE: Do not leave any device (except
the battery charger), that draws power
from the vehicle, connected to the socket for
extended periods without the engine running.
This may lead to excessive battery drain.
151
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
FLUID TOPPING UP MANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING

Engine oil ......................................................................... 154 Unlocking - discharged battery ......................................... 177
Gearbox oil level .............................................................. 156 Starting the vehicle ........................................................... 179
Coolant............................................................................. 157 Door opening from inside - discharged battery ................ 180
Power steering fluid ......................................................... 158 Opening luggage compartment - discharged battery ....... 181
Brake fluid ........................................................................ 159 Replacing key fob battery ................................................. 182
Windscreen and headlamp washers ................................ 160 WASHERS AND WIPERS
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT Replacing the wiper blade ................................................ 184
Luggage compartment equipment ................................... 161 WHEELS AND TYRES
Warning triangle ............................................................... 161 Wheels and tyres.............................................................. 185
First-aid kit ....................................................................... 162 Flat tyre ............................................................................ 190
Tyre sealant ..................................................................... 162
Towing eye....................................................................... 162 VEHICLE CARE
Fuel funnel ....................................................................... 163 Washing your McLaren .................................................... 192
Fire extinguisher .............................................................. 163 Cleaning the interior ......................................................... 195
BATTERY CARE AND MAINTENANCE RAISING THE VEHICLE
Battery safety ................................................................... 164 Vehicle lifting points.......................................................... 196
Charging the battery ........................................................ 165 McLAREN ASSISTANCE
Boost starting from another vehicle ................................. 165 McLaren Assistance ......................................................... 197
FUSES Replacement battery ........................................................ 197
Fuse replacement ............................................................ 168 In the event of a breakdown ............................................. 197
Main fusebox.................................................................... 169 Towing for recovery .......................................................... 198
Secondary fuse box ......................................................... 172 DRIVING ABROAD
Battery fuse box ............................................................... 174 Driving abroad .................................................................. 199
LIGHTING
Vehicle lights .................................................................... 176
153

FLUID TOPPING UP
MAINTAINING
TOPPING YOUR McLAREN
Checking the engine oil

FLUID UP
Engine oil
The engine oil level must be manually checked.
No automatic level checks or warnings are
provided.
OIL STATUS 14.38
2LO7HPSHUDWXUH
To check the engine oil level manually: °C
The engine uses approximately 0.1 litres of oil
1. Ensure the vehicle is stationary, positioned 7LPH USP
for every 625 miles (1000 km), depending on
on a level surface with the parking brake VHFRQGV
your style of driving. The oil consumption may
applied and neutral selected prior to 2LO/HYHO
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
checking the oil level. 2.
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
2. The level is viewed in the Vehicle Info
You will only be able to estimate the oil section in the left-hand display, see Vehicle
consumption after the vehicle has been driven info, page 117.
for several thousand miles or kilometres.
NOTE: Lubricant additives could damage
the engine or gearbox. Damage caused 3. Start the engine and hold the engine speed
by such additives is not covered by the vehicle at 2000 rpm for 20 seconds. Allow the
warranty. Further information is available from engine oil temperature to reach a
a McLaren Dealer. temperature between 40°C (104°F) and
70°C (158°F).
NOTE: The engine oil check will be
aborted if the engine speed exceeds
3000 rpm or falls below 1750 rpm.
154

FLUID TOPPING UP
4. When the timer has reached '0', the oil level Topping-up the engine oil 2. Unscrew the engine oil filler cap (arrowed).
will be shown on the display along with a WARNING: There is a risk of injury if 3. Top-up with the correct quantity of Mobil 1
description. the engine cover is open, even when New Life 0W-40 engine oil, in 0.25 litre
NOTE: The line on the display the engine is not running. quantities. Approximately 2.75 litres is
indicates the maximum oil level. Engine components become very hot. required to raise the level from minimum to
Avoid contact, there is a risk of severe maximum.
burns. NOTE: Do not overfill. Top-up in 0.25
litre quantities and then re-check
OIL STATUS 14.38 NOTE: McLaren only recommends the
before adding further oil.
use of Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil.
2LO7HPSHUDWXUH 4. Check the left-hand display to ensure level
81°C 1. Open the engine cover, see Engine cover,
is correct.
7LPH USP page 15.
VHFRQGV NOTE: If you have inadvertently
2LO/HYHO overfilled the engine with oil, you must
have any excess removed at a McLaren
0LQLPXP
Dealer. The engine or the catalytic
converter could be damaged.
5. If the engine oil is at the minimum level, top-

up the oil, 0,25 litre at a time.
155

FLUID TOPPING UP
5. Refit the engine oil filler cap.

Gearbox oil level
ENVIRONMENTAL: When topping up,
If you experience oil loss or problems with gear
take care not to spill any oil. Oil must
shifts, have the gearbox checked by your
not be allowed to escape into the soil or
McLaren Dealer.
waterways.
6. Close the engine cover, see Engine cover, NOTE: The gearbox is sealed for life and
page 15. does not need any servicing or topping-
up.
Oil temperature
If the oil temperature is too high, a warning will
be displayed in the left-hand display. Reduce
the vehicle speed until the warning message
extinguishes.
156

FLUID TOPPING UP
1. Open the engine cover, see Engine cover, 5. Top-up if necessary using only Mobil
Coolant page 15. Antifreeze Extra.
Coolant is a mixture of water and 6. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise to
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Only check the the stop.
coolant when the vehicle is positioned on level 7. Close the engine cover, see Engine cover,
ground and the engine is cool. page 15.
WARNING: The cooling system is
pressurised. Only unscrew the cap
when the engine is cool. You could be
scalded by hot escaping coolant.
WARNING: Coolant is highly
flammable. Fire, naked flames and
smoking are prohibited when handling
coolant.
WARNING: Coolant is toxic. Keep
containers sealed and away from
children. If coolant is accidentally 2. Slowly unscrew the cap (arrowed) by half a
consumed, seek medical help straight away. turn anti-clockwise and allow excess
pressure to escape.
3. Unscrew the cap fully and remove it.
4. The coolant level is correct when it is
between the lower and upper steps inside
the filler neck.
157

FLUID TOPPING UP
3. Open the luggage compartment, see

Power steering fluid Luggage compartment, page 16.
WARNING: Power steering fluid is 4. Turn the cap (arrowed) anti-clockwise and
highly flammable. Fire, naked flames remove it.
and smoking are prohibited when handling 5. The power steering fluid level is correct
power steering fluid. when it is between the lower and upper
WARNING: Power steering fluid is steps inside the filler neck.
toxic. Keep containers sealed and 6. Top up if necessary using only Pentosin
away from children. If fluid is accidentally CHF202 power steering fluid, contact a
consumed, seek medical help straight away.
MAX
MIN
McLaren Dealer
7. Replace the cap by turning it to the stop.
8. Close the luggage compartment, see
Luggage compartment, page 16.
Left-hand drive models
Checking fluid level

1. Switch the ignition on and select normal
handling mode, see Handling control,
MAX
MIN
page 72.
2. Allow the engine to idle for 20 seconds
before checking the fluid level.
Right-hand drive models
158

FLUID TOPPING UP

Brake fluid
WARNING: Brake fluid is highly Luggage compartment, page 16. MAX
flammable. Fire, naked flames and MIN
smoking are prohibited when handling
brake fluid.
MAX MAX
WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. Keep MIN

MIN
containers sealed and away from

children. If fluid is accidentally consumed,
seek medical help straight away. MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
WARNING: Only use fluid from new, air

tight containers.
NOTE: Avoid spilling brake fluid, it is MAX
MIN
harmful to painted surfaces. Any spillages

Left-hand drive models
must be removed immediately with a mixture of
car shampoo and water. 2. Unscrew the cap (arrowed) anti-clockwise
and remove it.
Right-hand drive models 3. The brake fluid is correct if the level just
covers the base of the filter in the filler neck.
4. Top up if necessary using only new
Pentosin DoT 5.1 brake fluid.
5. Replace the cap by turning it to the stop.
6. Close the luggage compartment, see
159

FLUID TOPPING UP

Windscreen and headlamp washers
WARNING: Some washer fluids are Luggage compartment, page 16.
highly flammable. Fire, naked flames 2. Mix a solution of Esso Screenwash MAX
and smoking are prohibited when handling

MIN
concentrate and water in a container before

washer fluid. adding to the reservoir. Concentration of the
WARNING: Washer fluid is toxic. Keep washer solution should be mixed to suit the
containers sealed and away from outside temperatures.
children. If fluid is accidentally consumed,
seek medical help straight away. MAX
MIN
NOTE: McLaren recommends the use of

Esso Screenwash concentrate.
Use only an ammonia-free washer fluid suitable
for plastic headlamp lenses. Unsuitable washer
fluid may cause damage to the headlamps. 3. Open the reservoir cap, top up the reservoir
with washer fluid and close the cap.
NOTE: Add washer fluid to the reservoir
all year round. 4. Close the luggage compartment, see
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir, which is located in the
luggage compartment.
The reservoir has a capacity of approximately 4
litres.
160

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Setting up the warning triangle

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Luggage compartment equipment Warning triangle*
3
1 1
3 4 5
Fold the legs (1) sideways from the bottom.

1. Warning triangle*, page 161 The warning triangle (1) is located at the front
2. First-aid kit*, page 162 of the luggage compartment. Pull side reflectors (2) upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using press-
3. Tyre sealant, page 162
stud (3).
4. Towing eye, page 162
Place the warning triangle at an appropriate
5. Fuel funnel, page 163
distance from the vehicle to warn other traffic of
NOTE: The towing eye and the fuel funnel a breakdown.
are supplied fitted inside the first aid kit
container.
161

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
First-aid kit* Tyre sealant Towing eye
3 4
The first-aid kit (2) is located at the front of the The tyre sealant (3) is located at the front of the The towing eye (4) is located inside the first aid
luggage compartment. luggage compartment luggage. kit case at the front of the luggage
compartment luggage.
NOTE: Check the expiry dates of the first- For instructions on how to use the tyre sealant,
aid kit materials every year, and replace see Flat tyre, page 190. NOTE: Your McLaren is equipped with a
them if necessary. front towing eye mounting only. It is not
possible to tow other vehicles.
For information on installing the towing eye,
see Towing eye and mounting, page 198.
162

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
To operate, follow the manufacturer’s

Fuel funnel Fire extinguisher* instructions on the side of the fire extinguisher.
The fire extinguisher is located at the front of NOTE: The fire extinguisher must be
the luggage compartment. checked every year or it may fail in an
emergency. Once the extinguisher is used it will
have to be replaced.
The fuel funnel (5) is located inside the first aid

kit at the front of the luggage compartment
luggage.
Release the retaining strap and remove the fire
NOTE: Only use the fuel funnel when extinguisher.
filling the vehicle with fuel from sources
other than a fuel pump on a garage forecourt.
Do not use the fuel funnel when topping-up
coolant, engine oil or any other fluids in the
vehicle.
163

BATTERY CARE AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING: Before use, check that all

Battery safety cables are in good condition; do not

NOTE: Your McLaren is fitted with a use cables that are damaged.
lithium ion battery. Only a lithium ion Ensure that all cables are kept away from
battery charger can be used on this type of sharp edges, are not pinched or trapped
battery. Contact a McLaren Dealer for more and are not close to hot surfaces or water.
information.
Never charge a damaged battery. The
Before using the battery charger, familiarise battery must only be charged in a well
yourself with the following safety information. ventilated area; the charger must never be
WARNING: Have the battery tested at a covered or placed on the battery.
McLaren Dealer, every two years or Do not place any metal objects on a battery.
12 000 miles (20 000 km) and replaced if You could cause a short circuit and the
necessary. If it is necessary to replace the battery could ignite.
battery, contact a McLaren Dealer.
Keep the charger out of reach of children at
all times.
164

Refer to the instructions supplied with the

Charging the battery battery charger. The charger connects to the Boost starting from another vehicle
NOTE: To maintain your lithium ion battery accessory socket (arrowed) in the luggage Using booster cables
in optimum condition, always leave the compartment.
WARNING: Ensure that both batteries
battery charger connected to the battery and are 12V and that the booster cables
switched on during periods when your vehicle
have insulated clamps and are approved for
is not in regular use.
use with 12V batteries.
NOTE: Do not connect the battery charger
WARNING: Do not connect positive (+)
to the interior accessory socket.
terminals to negative (-) terminals.
WARNING: Take care when working
near rotating parts of the engine.
Ensure cables are kept well clear.
NOTE: Do not use a 24V booster start
system. These produce excessive voltage
and can damage the vehicle's electrical
system.
NOTE: It is not possible to push or tow
MAX
MIN
start a vehicle with a discharged battery.
NOTE: If using a donor vehicle, please
allow it to have the engine running for a
minimum of two minutes before trying to start
the disabled vehicle.
165

Boosting procedure
1. If a donor vehicle is to be used, park it so 1
that the battery location is adjacent, but
MAX MAX
MIN MIN
ensure the two vehicles do not touch.

2. Apply the parking brake and ensure that the 5 5
2 2
transmission of both vehicles is set in 3 4 4
neutral (or Park for vehicles with automatic
transmission).
3. Switch off the ignition and all electrical
equipment in both vehicles.
NOTE: Before connecting booster
cables ensure that the battery
connections on the disabled vehicle are
correct and that all electrical equipment has
been switched off. 5. Remove the finisher (1) from around the top 8. Remove the 7 screws (4) securing the side
4. Open the luggage compartment and of the luggage compartment liner. and the base luggage compartment liner.
remove any items stowed inside. 6. Remove the two stowage nets (2). 9. Remove the 10 screws (5) securing the top
7. Remove the carpet (3). edge of the luggage compartment liner.
10. Remove the luggage compartment liner.
166

14. Connect the other end of the negative (-) 19. Allow both vehicles to idle for two minutes.
booster cable to the negative (-) terminal on 20. Switch off the donor vehicle.
MAX
the disabled vehicle's battery (B).

MIN
NOTE: Do not switch on any electrical

15. Check that the cables are clear of any
circuits on the previously disabled
moving components and that all four vehicle until after the booster cables have
connections are secure.
been removed.
WARNING: Ensure that each
NOTE: If battery has gone flat, or has
connection is securely made and
been disconnected, it may be
that there is no risk of the clips
necessary to reset the windows, see
accidentally slipping or being pulled
Resetting the windows, page 133. If this
from the connection points/battery
B A does not resolve the issue, please contact a
terminal - this could cause sparking,
McLaren Dealer immediately.
which could lead to fire or explosion.
16. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and Disconnecting the cables
11. Connect one end of the positive (+) booster allow it to run for two minutes. WARNING: To avoid serious injury, use
cable to the positive (+) terminal on the 17. The electrical system on the disabled caution when removing the booster
donor vehicle's battery. vehicle should now be ready for the engine cables as the engine on the previously
12. Connect the other end of the positive (+) to be started. disabled vehicle will be running. You will be
booster cable to the positive (+) terminal on 18. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. working close to components carrying high
the disabled vehicle's battery (A). voltage, or may be hot.
13. Connect one end of negative (-) booster 1. Disconnect the booster cables in the
cable to the negative (-) terminal on the reverse order to that used for connection.
donor vehicle's battery. 2. Refit the luggage compartment liner and
secure with the 17 screws.
3. Fit the stowage nets, the carpet and the top
finisher.
4. Stow the contents removed from the
167

FUSES
There are three fuseboxes fitted to your

FUSES
Fuse replacement McLaren.

WARNING: Fuses protect the vehicle's
electrical systems. The failure of any
fuse will render the system it protects Fusebox Location
inoperative. Main fusebox Behind a panel in the rear
Use replacement fuses of the same rating bulkhead, behind the left-
and type. Incorrect fuse ratings can hand seat
overload a system and cause a fire or
Secondary Below the dashboard on the
malfunction. Blown fuses should be
fusebox passenger side
replaced and no attempt should be made to
repair a blown fuse. Battery On top of the battery
NOTE: Before removing a fuse, turn off all fusebox
electrical equipment and switch off the
ignition.
168

FUSES
4. Remove the appropriate fuse and replace it

Main fusebox 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 with a fuse of the same value as the
50 51 52
13 13 13 13 13
8 9 10 11 12
Main fusebox access SEE OWNERS 13 13 13 13 13
53 54 55
original. If in doubt, check the fuse
MANUAL
18 19 20 21 22
40 39 38 37 36
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 specification chart.
56 57 58
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5. Fit the access panel by inserting the two
upper retaining clips in the bulkhead and
securing with the two lower clips.
NOTE: If a replacement fuse does not
solve the electrical problem, or it fails
immediately, contact a McLaren Dealer.
2. Release the two lower clips securing the

panel to the bulkhead and remove the panel
MCL0282
3. Refer to the fuse specification chart to
1. To access the main fuse box, pull the determine which fuse protects the non-
release strap and tilt the left-hand seat functioning electrical system.
backrest forwards. NOTE: A label identifying the fuses is
attached to the inside of the access
panel.
169

FUSES
Main fuse box fuse specification chart No. Amps Circuit protected
No. Amps Circuit protected
F15 10 Relays F33 30 Electronic Park Brake Motor

No. Amps Circuit protected Left-Hand
F16 10 OBD2 Diagnostics
F1 60 Secondary Air Pump F34 30 Electronic Park Brake Motor
F17 3 Door Locking Switch
F2 - - Right-Hand
F18 50 ECU Main Relay Control
F3 - - F35 - -
F19 - - F36 20 Battery Main Relay
F4 - -
F20 30 Seat Driver
F5 30 Powertrain Chassis Control F37 15 Emission Control Systems
Unit F21 30 Seat Passenger
F38 15 Fuel Injection and Ignition -
F6 30 Powertrain Chassis Control F22 - - Left-Hand Bank
Unit F39 15 Fuel Injection and Ignition -
F23 5 Tilt and Microwave Sensor
F7 30 Starter Right-Hand Bank
F24 - -
F8 30 Heated Rear Window F40 10 Engine Ancillaries
F25 10 Driver/Passenger Door Latch
F9 30 Audio Amplifier R41 - Headlamp Wash Pump
F26 10 ICPC
F10 - - R42 - Vacuum Pump relay
F27 5 Electronic Park Brake
F11 - -
F28 - -
F12 15 Headlamp Wash Pump
F29 20 Vacuum Pump
F13 5 Powertrain Chassis Control
F30 - -
Unit
F31 50 Cooling Fan Left-Hand
F14 5 Engine ECU
F32 50 Cooling Fan Right-Hand
170

FUSES
No. Amps Circuit protected No. Amps Circuit protected
R43 - Vacuum Pump relay R51 - Heated Rear Window and

Umbilical
R44 - -
R52 - Fuel Pump relay 2
F45 10 Electrical Thermostats,
Camshaft Actuators R53 - Powertrain Chassis Control
Unit
F46 - -
R54 - Powertrain Chassis Control
F47 - -
Unit
F48 - -
R55 - Starter
F49 - - R56 - Secondary Air Pump
R50 - Fuel Pump relay 1
R57 - Cooling Fan Left-Hand
R58 - ECU Main relay Control
171

FUSES
3. Remove the side fixing clip (2).

Secondary fuse box
NOTE: If you wish to lower the closing
Secondary fusebox access panel fully, also remove the two clips at the
1. Access to the secondary fusebox is gained rear (3).
by lowering the closing panel below the 4. Lower the closing panel, sufficiently to gain
dashboard on the passenger’s side. access to the fusebox.
25
25
25
35
35
35
35
NOTE: Do not lower the closing panel
further than necessary as it could be
damaged.
10
3
7.5
3
10
START
ENGINE 1
STOP
S S
with a fuse of the same value as the
N
N
T
AERO MANUAL
ACTIVE
original. If in doubt, check the fuse
WINTER LAUNCH
specification chart.
P 6. Raise the closing panel into position, fit the
clip and fit and tighten the two front screws
3 2 screws.
2. Remove the two front screws (1).
172

FUSES
Secondary fuse box fuse specification chart
F1 25 Driver's door
F2 25 Passenger's door
F3 25 Lights
F4 35 Lights
F5 35 Body
F6 35 Body
F7 35 Alarm
F8 5 Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)
F9 3 Door sensors
F10 10 Air conditioning
F11 3 Alarm Control Unit

F12 3 Tracker
F13 7.5 Alarm
F14 10 Instrument cluster
173

FUSES
Battery fuse box

Battery fusebox access MAX
MIN
1. Open the luggage compartment and

remove any items stowed inside. 5 5
4 4
1
MAX
MIN
2 2
3
5. Remove the 7 screws (4) securing the side 8. Press the catch on the right-hand side of
and the base luggage compartment liner. the cover (arrowed) and remove the cover
6. Remove the 10 screws (5) securing the top from the fusebox.
edge of the luggage compartment liner.
7. Remove the luggage compartment liner.
2. Remove the finisher (1) from around the top
of the luggage compartment liner.
3. Remove the two stowage nets (2).
4. Remove the carpet (3).
174

FUSES
11. Refit the luggage compartment liner and Battery fuse box fuse specification chart
secure with the 17 screws.
12. Fit the stowage nets, the carpet and the top
finisher.
20
13. Stow the contents removed from the 1 30 Fuel Pump 1 Relay Supply
40 luggage compartment.
20
20
2 30 Fuel Pump 2 Relay Supply
30
30
30
3 30 Air Conditioning - Motor -
Control Module
4 20 Fascia Fuse Box - Supply
5 20 Electronic Stability Control

valves
6 40 Electronic Stability Control

motor
with a fuse of the same value as the
original. If in doubt, check the fuse 7 20 Auxiliary Power Socket -
specification chart. Luggage Compartment
10. Engage the left-hand side of the cover with
8 - Spare
the fusebox, and push the right-hand side
down to fully engage the clip. 9 80 Electro Hydraulic Power
Assisted Steering
10 200 Main Fuse Box Supply
11 100 Secondary Fuse Box Supply
175

LIGHTING
Headlamps
LIGHTING
Vehicle lights
Your McLaren is fitted with bi-xenon
Lighting is an important aspect of vehicle headlamps. These provide greater visibility on
safety. You must therefore ensure that all lights both dipped and main beams, especially during
are working at all times. adverse weather and driving conditions. In
The following lights on your McLaren use the addition, the life of a bi-xenon bulb is
latest Light Emitting Diode technology: significantly longer than that of a conventional
headlamp bulb.
1. Daytime running lights
WARNING: Xenon bulbs contain
2. Direction indicators and side repeater lights
mercury, operate at very high
3. Reverse light temperatures and with extremely high
4. Rear fog light voltage.
5. Tail/brake lights Never attempt to replace a xenon bulb.
Unlike traditional filament bulbs, these lights Replacement of these bulbs must be carried
have a long life and low power consumption out by a McLaren Dealer.
while providing the same amount of NOTE: Do not attempt to change bulbs or
illumination. Light Emitting Diodes yourself, as you
could damage the vehicle lighting systems.
Have faulty lights rectified by a McLaren
Dealer.
176

MANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
Unlocking and opening procedure

Unlocking - discharged battery

If you are unable to lock or unlock the vehicle
because the vehicle battery or key fob battery
has become discharged, use the mechanical
key.
2. The mechanical lock is located behind a

panel on the upper face of the left-hand side
1. Press release catch and remove the
mechanical key from the key fob. air intake.
Using the recess at the rear of the panel,
release the three clips securing the panel to
the body and release the panel.
3. Push the panel back towards the mesh
grille.
177

4. Rotate and carefully bend the panel slightly 6. Apply pressure to the latch area of the door 7. Fit the mechanical key back into the key
to release the front tab. (to counteract pressure of the door seals), fob.
and turn the key further to release the door
NOTE: The panel is not tethered to the NOTE: Unlocking the vehicle using the
vehicle and can be removed NOTE: If the vehicle battery is mechanical key will activate the anti-
completely after the clips have been discharged, the windows will not lower. theft system and may cause the alarm to
released. Ensure that the panel is stored Take care when opening or closing the sound. Once the door is open, place the
safely and cannot be damaged when the door. Do not force the door open or closed, key fob on the section of the cup holder
mechanical key is used. the door seals or window could be housing immediately behind the switch
5. Insert the mechanical key into the lock and damaged. panel. within 10 seconds. The vehicle will
turn the key until mechanical resistance is recognise the key fob and stop the alarm
preventing full release of the door. from sounding.
8. Replace the key fob battery at the earliest
possible opportunity, see Replacing key fob
battery, page 182.
9. Replace the cover panel.
178

In this position the vehicle is able to sense the

Starting the vehicle presence of the valid key fob and the vehicle
can be started and driven.
Replace the key fob battery at the earliest
possible opportunity, see Replacing key fob
battery, page 182.
RT
STA E
AUTO
GIN
EN STOP T
S
OFF
UAL
N
MAN
S T P
O
N
AER
H IVE
ACT
NCH
LAU
ER
WINT
If the key fob battery has become discharged,

and the engine will not start.
Place the key fob on the section of the cup
holder housing immediately behind the switch
panel.
179

The door latch will then release, allowing the

Door opening from inside - discharged door to be partially raised before it
battery automatically swings outwards and upwards.
To refit the release strap, feed the strap into its
holder and snap the retainers into place.
NOTE: Only use this strap when the
battery has become discharged.
R
D
To release a door from inside, release the

manual door release strap retainer and pull the
strap.
180

Opening procedure
Opening luggage compartment -
1. Pull the handle (arrowed) in the left-hand
discharged battery
door aperture.
NOTE: The luggage compartment will not 2. The luggage compartment will unlock and
open if the battery is discharged or open slightly.
disconnected
3. Release the safety latch and open the
AUTO
20.0
AUTO
0
C
MONO
AC
AUTO
20.0
AUTO
0
C
181

Replacing key fob battery

Fit a new key fob battery every 12 months. You
can do this yourself, or entrust it to a McLaren
Dealer.
When the key fob battery is discharged, you will
only be able to unlock the vehicle with the
mechanical key.
You will require a single CR2032 3V battery.
WARNING: The battery contains toxic
substances. If a battery is swallowed,
contact a doctor immediately.
ENVIRONMENTAL: Do not dispose of the

battery with the household waste. 1. Press the release catch and remove the 2. Slide the button pad away from the key fob.
Batteries contain toxic substances. mechanical key from the key fob.
Take the discharged battery to a McLaren
Dealer or to a recycling point for used batteries.
182

5. Fit the battery holder back into the key fob

and replace the back cover.
6. Refit the button pad and the mechanical
key.
3. Remove the back cover from the key fob 4. Remove the discharged battery from the
and remove the battery holder. battery holder and install a new battery
ensuring that the polarity is correct.
NOTE: Do not touch the new battery.
Moisture and oil from fingers can
affect battery life and cause corrosion of the
contacts.
183

WASHERS AND WIPERS
To remove the wiper blade NOTE: Never open the luggage

WASHERS AND WIPERS
Replacing the wiper blade compartment lid when the wiper arm is
WARNING: Ensure the ignition is positioned away from the windscreen. You
switched off before you replace the could damage the luggage compartment
wiper blade. The windscreen wiper could be cover and/or the wiper arm. Do not lower
set in motion and injure you. the wiper arm onto the windscreen without
the wiper blade fitted.
WARNING: Replace the wiper blade
every twelve months or the windscreen 2. Depress the clip and slide the wiper blade
will not be wiped properly. You may not be out from the arm.
able to observe the road and traffic A
To install a new wiper blade
conditions as a result and could cause an
accident. 1. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm
and ensure that the clip engages in the arm.
2. Lower the wiper arm onto the windscreen.
1. Ensure the ignition is switched off and raise

the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
NOTE: Do not raise the end of the
wiper arm more than 300mm (12
inches), dimension A from the windscreen
as the washer jet components may be
damaged.
184

WHEELS AND TYRES
McLaren recommends that you only use Pirelli NOTE: Retreaded tyres must not be used.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheels and tyres summer or winter tyres, See Wheel and tyre Do not fit used tyres if you have no
WARNING: Have worn tyres replaced in sizes, page 208. information about their previous usage.
axle pairs and ensure the tyres are These tyres best provide the best possible NOTE: Modification to the brake system
fitted as specified, see Tyres, page 187. With performance in conjunction with the safety and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use
worn tyres, the driving stability of the systems on your vehicle and have been of spacer plates or brake dust shields. Any
vehicle will be adversely affected, especially specifically approved by McLaren. such modifications will invalidate the vehicle
when driving at high speeds. warranty.
McLaren cannot accept any responsibility for
 With new tyres, avoid high speed damage that may result from use of other tyres NOTE: A wheel change must be carried
cornering and excess speed. and wheels. Further information about wheels out at a McLaren Dealer. The vehicle
 Only have wheels and tyres of the same and tyres can be obtained from a McLaren could be damaged if it is jacked up incorrectly
type and make fitted. Dealer.
NOTE: Store tyres in a cool, dry place,
 Never use a tyre which has been NOTE: Using tyres other than those which preferably in the dark. Protect the tyres
punctured and then repaired. have been recommended by McLaren, from oil, grease and petrol.
 Only have tyres of the correct size fitted. may adversely affect the handling, noise levels
 Tyres degrade over time due to the and fuel consumption. In addition, when driving
effects of ultraviolet light, extreme with a load or when using snow chains, they
temperatures, high loads, and could cause the tyres to contact the bodywork
environmental conditions. It is and axle components. This could result in
recommended that tyres are replaced damage to the tyres or the vehicle.
every six years, or sooner if required.
185

WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre markings 5. The numbers denote load index and the

letter indicates the speed rating. 91
6 indicates a weight of 1350 lbs (615 kg) and
LBS
AD
kg Y indicates speeds over 186 mph (300
M
AX
LO
7 kph).
TR TE
8 6. Displays the maximum load which can be
EA MPE
DW RAT
AR URE
5 carried by the tyre
E
)
(91Y
7. Wear rate indicator. The higher the figure

4
R 19
the longer a tyre will last.
TRACTIO
3
DOT
9 8. The alpha character denotes resistance to
N
Z
35
2 heat. An 'A' rated tyre offers most heat

5/
resistance.
23
RA
DI
A
L
TU
1
BE
LE
SS
9. Information about the manufacture of the
tyre. Contains place and date of
manufacture.
1. Width of tyre in millimetres

2. Tyre profile given as percentage of tyre
width.
3. Indicates that the tyre is radial ply.
4. Indicates the diameter of the wheel rim in
inches.
186

WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres Asymmetric tyres WARNING: The tyres must be mounted

WARNING: The tyres must be mounted according to the labelling on the tyre
according to the labelling on the tyre wall. The benefits of asymmetric tyres will
wall. The word 'OUTSIDE' must be on the only be available if the tyres are fitted
outer edge of the tyre when it is fitted to the correctly.
wheel or the stability of the vehicle will be
adversely affected, especially at high Inspecting wheels and tyres
speeds. At least every 14 days, check the tyres for cuts,
punctures, tears, bumps, deformation and
cracks. Check wheels for severe corrosion.
Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tyre
pressure.
Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tyre. Turn the front wheels to full lock in
order to inspect the inner tread.
Asymmetric tyres have a tread pattern that is
different from one side of the tread to the other.
This combination of tread offers better grip in
both wet and dry conditions.
The outer tread features a larger stiffer tread
pattern that aids with cornering stability. The
inner tread pattern aids stability in wet
conditions. A central groove in the tyre aids
straight line stability.
187

WHEELS AND TYRES
NOTE: It is recommended that you always Driving precautions

have your tyres replaced by a McLaren When parking your McLaren, ensure that the
Dealer. If TPMS is fitted, each wheel has a tyre tyres do not contact the kerb or other obstacles.
pressure sensor connected to the tyre valve. In If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed
order to avoid damage to the sensor, the tyres humps or potholes, drive slowly and at a
must be replaced using the correct procedure. shallow angle or the tyres could be damaged.
WARNING: Tyre grip decreases rapidly While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
on wet or icy roads, particularly when noises and unusual handling characteristics,
the tread depth is close to the minimum. e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
You could lose control of the vehicle and the tyres or wheels are damaged. If you
cause an accident due to the reduced grip experience anything unusual, reduce your
of the tyres. Reduce your speed and drive speed and stop the vehicle as soon as safety
with greater care. permits to check the tyres and wheels for
NOTE: If tread wear is uneven across the damage. If you find no signs of damage, have
tyre, or becomes excessive, the wheel the tyres and wheels inspected at a McLaren
When the tread is worn to 1.6 mm, the wear
alignment should be checked. Dealer.
indicators appear on the surface of the tread
pattern, producing a continuous band of rubber Regularly check the pressure of all your tyres
across the width of the tyre. Tyres must be and correct the pressure as necessary, see
replaced as soon as the wear indicator Tyre pressures, page 189.
becomes visible, or sooner if legislation
All wheels must have a valve cap fitted to
dictates replacement at a greater tread depth.
protect the valve against dirt and moisture.
188

WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre pressures NOTE: In some markets, the tyre pressure

WARNING: Tyre pressure that is too label is attached to the driver's sill panel.
high or too low has a negative effect on R19 R20 NOTE: Tyre pressures given for low loads
the vehicle's active safety, this could lead to Bar Psi Bar Psi
are minimum values which offer optimum
an accident. Frequently check the pressure >270kph/165mph
Bar
2.2
2.3
2.5
R19
Psi
32
34
36
Bar
2.4
2.5
2.7
R20
Psi
35
36
39
>270kph/165mph
ride comfort.
of all tyres, particularly prior to long trips,
and correct the pressure as necessary. Increased pressures for higher loads will not
adversely affect the running of the vehicle, but
WARNING: If the pressure in a tyre ride comfort will be impaired.
drops repeatedly, inspect the tyre for
foreign objects or signs of punctures, check Check the pressures when the tyres are cold. If
the valve for air leaks. it is necessary to check the tyres when they are
warm, pressures will be higher. Do not let air
out of warm tyres to match the recommended
cold tyre pressures.
For the tyre pressures for various operating

conditions, see Tyre pressures, page 209. They
are also printed on a label attached to the fuel
filler flap.
If the vehicle is to be driven at high speeds, the
tyre pressure must be checked, and if
necessary adjusted.
189

WHEELS AND TYRES
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too Repairing a puncture
low can: Flat tyre
1. Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
 create a risk of tyre failure with resultant Your McLaren is equipped with a can of tyre from traffic and on a firm and level surface.
accidents, causing injury or death; sealant, which is located in the luggage 2. If on a public highway, switch on the hazard
compartment.
 shorten the life of the tyres; warning lamps, see Hazard warning lamps,
 cause increased tyre damage; In the event of a puncture, follow the steps page 44.
below to ensure your safety and the safety of 3. Passengers should exit the vehicle safely
 have a negative effect on handling
other vehicle occupants and other road users. and remain well away from the vehicle, the
characteristics (e.g. by causing
road and any traffic.
aquaplaning).
4. Apply the parking brake and select neutral.
ENVIRONMENTAL: Check tyre pressures
5. Place the warning triangle at an appropriate
at least every 14 days.
distance from the vehicle to warn other
traffic of a breakdown, see Warning
Interchanging wheels
triangle*, page 161.
NOTE: Only approved wheels with winter
tyres can be fitted to your McLaren as
alternatives
190

WHEELS AND TYRES
Using the tyre sealant WARNING: The tyre sealant is unable Have the punctured tyre replaced as soon as
to seal punctures if: possible.
 there are cuts or punctures in the tyre WARNING: Have punctured tyres
greater than 4 mm; replaced. McLaren do not recommend
 the rims are damaged; that punctured tyres are repaired.
 you have driven at very low tyre WARNING: If the tyre sealant comes
pressures or with flat tyres. into contact with your eyes or skin,
Contact a McLaren Dealer immediately. immediately rinse thoroughly with clean
water, change out of clothing which has
Remove the tyre sealant from the luggage been in contact with the tyre sealant. If an
compartment and follow the instructions on the allergic reaction occurs, contact a doctor
container. immediately.
NOTE: If possible, locate the cause of the WARNING: Keep the tyre sealant out of
puncture and position the wheel so the reach of children. If tyre sealant is
puncture is at the lowest point to enable the swallowed, immediately rinse the mouth
sealant to be more effective. thoroughly and drink a large amount of
You can use the tyre sealant to seal small
punctures, particularly those in the tyre's tread. water. Do not induce vomiting. Contact a
The tyre sealant can be used at ambient doctor immediately. Do not inhale tyre
temperatures down to -20°C (-4°F). sealant fumes.
NOTE: After using tyre sealant, the tyre
valve, incorporating the tyre pressure
monitoring system sensor*, will have to be
replaced.
191

VEHICLE CARE
Using an automatic car wash NOTE: If using a car wash where your car
VEHICLE CARE
Washing your McLaren will remain stationary during the wash

ENVIRONMENTAL: Some cleaning cycle and you intend to exit the vehicle prior to
products contain chemicals that are washing, lock it using the key fob and stand
hazardous to the environment. Always take well clear of the vehicle and the car wash, to
precautions to prevent fluids from spilling and P
ensure that the key fob is at least 3 metres (9.8
never use excessive quantities. feet) or greater distance away from the vehicle
and car wash.
D
NOTE: To prevent damage to your

McLaren always heed the following:
 switch off the windscreen wipers;
 lock the vehicle before it enters the wash, to
prevent inadvertent opening of a door;
 on conveyor type car washes, switch on the
ignition, engage neutral and release the
parking brake.
192

VEHICLE CARE
Hand washing your McLaren 3. Working from the top of the vehicle down, 5. Once the vehicle is clean, work from the top
Prior to hand washing, lock the vehicle and wash the vehicle, ideally using a lambswool of the vehicle down and rinse the vehicle
place the key out of range (at least 3 metres wash mitt rather than a sponge, use thoroughly using a hose pipe held at a
(9.8 feet) or greater distance) to ensure that the generous quantities of water paying shallow angle.
doors do not open. particular attention to door shuts and other 6. Dry the vehicle using a chamois leather or
areas where dirt can accumulate. Use one drying towel.
NOTE: Do not wash the vehicle in direct
wash mitt for the top of the vehicle (roof,
sunlight or if it is hot to the touch, this may
bonnet and areas above the wheel arch
cause water marks and streaks.
line) and a separate mitt for areas below the
Do not use household detergents, these wheel arch line.
products will discolour painted surfaces and
NOTE: Do not clean the wheels with
remove protective wax finishes.
these wash mitts.
1. Pre-rinse the body thoroughly with a hose
NOTE: Do not allow the shampoo to
pipe held at a shallow angle to loosen any
dry, it will leave streaks on the paint
dirt and wet the paintwork ready for
work.
washing.
4. Tar spots and stubborn grease marks can
2. Prepare a bucket of warm water and a good
be removed using white spirit or denatured
quality car shampoo. Refer to the shampoo
alcohol. After cleaning, immediately wash
manufacturer's instructions for dilution
the area with soapy water to remove all
ratios.
traces of spirit or alcohol.
193

VEHICLE CARE
Washing the wheels Windscreen, windows and mirrors Polishing

NOTE: Wash the wheels frequently, do Regularly clean all windows inside and out Occasionally polish the paint work using a good
not allow brake dust to become ingrained using a window cleaning solution. An quality polish, following up with a protective
in the wheel rim finish. automotive glass cleaner is recommended. wax.
After washing the vehicle with car shampoo
Wash the wheels using warm water, a good NOTE: Do not use cutting compound,
quality car shampoo and a wheel brush or containing wax, clean the outside of the colour restoration products or polishes
windscreen with glass cleaner. Do not use
wash mitt that is used only on the wheels. containing a harsh abrasive. These can scratch
Apply polish to non-satin finished wheels to abrasive cleaning compounds as mirror glass is
the surface and permanently damage the paint
assist in keeping them clean. particularly susceptible to damage. work.
NOTE: Never apply polish to satin finish Underbody cleaning Paint damage and rectification
wheels, this will result in localised glossy Salt used on roads to control snow and ice
Regularly inspect the paint work for damage.
patches on the surface of the wheel. during the winter can collect on the vehicle's Any stone chips or deep scratches should be
NOTE: Do not use acid based wheel underbody, if this is not removed, corrosion can
repaired as soon as possible. Contact a
cleaners as these can damage the wheel occur. During the winter months, regularly hose
McLaren Dealer for advice.
rim finish leading to corrosion. the underbody with water paying particular
attention to the wheel arches and areas where
Wiper blades and rubber seals dirt can accumulate.
Clean wiper blades and rubber seals using
warm water and a good quality car shampoo
only. Do not use petroleum or alcohol-based
cleaners.
194

VEHICLE CARE
Leather Seat belts

Cleaning the interior
Before cleaning leather, always test the Extend the belts and clean with warm soapy
NOTE: A McLaren Dealer will be able to cleaning solution on a concealed area. Clean water only. Do not use any type of detergent or
recommend products for cleaning the with warm water and a non-detergent soap or a chemical cleaning product. Allow the belts to
interior of your vehicle. proprietary leather cleaner. Dry with a dry, dry naturally while extended, preferably away
clean, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasive from direct sunlight.
Carpet and fabrics cleaning products or polish.
Before cleaning upholstery, always test the Instruments and display screens
Do not polish the upper surfaces of the
cleaning solution on a concealed area. Clean Clean the instrument cluster using a damp
dashboard. Polished surfaces are reflective
with diluted upholstery cleaner and a clean cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaning products or
and may interfere with the driver's view. Clean
cloth. polish.
with diluted upholstery cleaner, then wipe with
a damp cloth.
195

RAISING THE VEHICLE
RAISING THE VEHICLE
Vehicle lifting points
Refer to the illustration, and labels on the

vehicle, for correct lifting locations.
Make this information available to any third
parties who may be assisting in the recovery of
your McLaren.
NOTE: Lifting the vehicle at any other
points will damage the vehicle.
NOTE: Use a jack with a flat lifting
platform and a rubber pad to protect the
chassis from surface damage. Do not lift under
a body panel.
196

McLAREN ASSISTANCE
McLAREN ASSISTANCE
McLaren Assistance Replacement battery In the event of a breakdown

If your McLaren is immobilised, do not attempt If your McLaren has been immobilised due to a In the event of a problem with your vehicle,
to make your own arrangements for assistance. fault with the vehicle battery, it is possible for contact a McLaren Dealer. If a McLaren Dealer
Refer to your Service and Warranty your McLaren Dealer or the Assistance is unavailable, contact the Roadside
provider to fit a lead acid battery as an Assistance Operator who is available 24 hours
documentation, this contains all the information
emergency short term solution. a day, 7 days a week.
you need.
NOTE: If a lead acid battery is fitted, it NOTE: The contact details of your
must be replaced with the correct Roadside Assistance Operator can be
specification lithium ion battery at the earliest found in your Service and Warranty booklet.
opportunity.
The McLaren Dealer or Roadside Assistance
You will also notice error messages appearing Operator will verify your identity and that of
in the left-hand display. your vehicle, as well as determining your exact
location.
They will then discuss the problem with you
and, with your agreement, determine the best
solution.
197

McLAREN ASSISTANCE
Towing eye and mounting NOTE: To avoid damage to the towing

Towing for recovery eye and the vehicle, it is important to
The towing eye is located at the front of the
Your McLaren is equipped with a front towing luggage compartment. ensure that the towing eye is in full contact
eye mounting only. with the mating surface of the front
1. Remove the cover from the towing eye
structure.
NOTE: Do not tow the vehicle, doing so mounting in the front bumper.
could damage the gearbox. The towing NOTE: A winch cable/strap must be
eye must only be used to winch the vehicle secured to the towing eye only or the
onto a trailer or transporter for recovery vehicle could be damaged.
purposes. 3. Remove the towing eye, stow it in the
Do not use a rigid bar to tow the vehicle. luggage compartment and refit the cover to
the towing eye mounting as soon as the
vehicle has been recovered.
2. Screw the towing eye clockwise into the

mounting hole, ensuring that it is screwed in
to the full extent of the thread.
198

DRIVING ABROAD
DRIVING ABROAD
Driving abroad
McLaren Dealers are also at your disposal
when you are travelling abroad.
The legal requirements when driving abroad
vary from country to country and are constantly
changing. Always seek advice from a McLaren
Dealer regarding what is required to remain
legal in the countries in which you are
travelling.
In certain countries, only low-octane fuel is
available. For further information about fuel
grades, see Recommended fuel, page 98.
199
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
GENUINE McLAREN PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Overview .......................................................................... 202
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Vehicle identification number ........................................... 203
DATA
Overview .......................................................................... 204
Vehicle operating temperatures ....................................... 204
Engine .............................................................................. 204
Speeds in each gear ........................................................ 205
Gear ratios ....................................................................... 206
Vehicle dimensions .......................................................... 206
Turning circle ................................................................... 207
Vehicle weights ................................................................ 207
Wheel and tyre sizes........................................................ 208
Tyre pressures ................................................................. 209
SERVICE PRODUCTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Service products .............................................................. 210
Engine oil specification .................................................... 210
Fuel .................................................................................. 210
Coolant............................................................................. 211
Power steering fluid ......................................................... 211
Brake fluid ........................................................................ 211
TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
Technical glossary ........................................................... 212
201

GENUINE McLAREN PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
VEHICLEMcLAREN
DATA AND GLOSSARY
Ensure that any accessories are suitable for

GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Overview your McLaren. Accessories which constitute a

McLaren recommends that you only use modification to the vehicle could invalidate the
genuine McLaren replacement parts and vehicle's warranty. This applies if they:
accessories. The use of non-genuine parts  change the vehicle type approved in the
could have a detrimental effect on the vehicle's warranty;
operation and safety. McLaren tests
 could endanger road users;
replacement parts and accessories, for
reliability, safety and suitability. McLaren  adversely affect the vehicle's emissions and
accepts no responsibility for the use of non- noise levels.
genuine parts on their vehicles, even if they Always quote the vehicle identification number,
have been independently approved. you will find this on the vehicle identification
In many countries, replacement parts and plate, and in the bottom left-hand corner of the
accessories are only officially approved for windscreen.
installation if they comply with legal
requirements. All genuine McLaren
replacement parts and accessories meet these
requirements.
Genuine McLaren parts and accessories can
be obtained from a McLaren Dealer where the
parts will be professionally fitted.
202

VIN plate
Vehicle identification number

McLaren Automotive Ltd
e*11*1234
MY: XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
kg
TYP:
0&/ PZ:
kg
1- kg
1,0%
2- kg
Made in .....
0&/
The vehicle identification number plate also

The vehicle identification number can be found contains the following:
on the bottom left-hand corner of the
windscreen.  maximum permitted laden weight;
 maximum permitted laden weight including
The number can also be found engraved on the
trailer;
body behind the right-hand seat, stamped on a
plate at the base of the driver's side B-post and  maximum permitted front axle laden weight;
viewed in the Vehicle Info section in the left-  maximum permitted rear axle laden weight.
hand display, see Vehicle identification,
page 119.
203

DATA
DATA
Overview Vehicle operating temperatures Engine

This section contains all the necessary
technical data for your vehicle and applies to Minimum ambient -20°C (-4°F) Rated output in kW 441 @ 7 000 rpm
the vehicle's standard equipment. The data operating temperature
may therefore differ for vehicles with optional Rated output in PS 600 @ 7 000 rpm
equipment. You can obtain further information Maximum ambient +50°C (122°F)
operating temperature Rated torque in Nm 600 @ 3 000 rpm
from a McLaren Dealer.
Rated torque in lb-ft 443 @ 3 000 rpm
NOTE: If the vehicle is used outside the
minimum and maximum ambient Number of cylinders 8
temperatures, performance degradation may
Displacement 3 798 cm3
be experienced.
Maximum engine speed 8 500 rpm
Power to weight ratio 461 PS/tonne
204

DATA
Fuel consumption Carbon Dioxide (CO2) emissions

Speeds in each gear
Urban 15.3 mpg (18.5 l/100 km) Urban 438 g/km 1st gear 50 mph (80 kph)
Extra urban 36.3 mpg (7.8 l/100 km) Extra urban 187 g/km 2nd gear 77 mph (124 kph)
Combined 24.2 mpg (11.7 l/100 km) Combined 279 g/km 3rd gear 106 mph (170 kph)
NOTE: Fuel consumption is calculated in ENVIRONMENTAL: Carbon Dioxide 4th gear 137 mph (220 kph)
accordance with EU Directive RL (CO2) is the gas which is considered to be 5th gear 175 mph (282 kph)
80/1268/EEC chiefly responsible for warming the earth's
NOTE: Combined fuel consumption is atmosphere. CO2 emissions and fuel 6th gear 205 mph (330 kph)
calculated using a weighting of consumption depend on:
7th gear 186 mph (300 kph)
approximately 37% for urban driving and  the efficient use of fuel by the engine;
approximately 63% for extra-urban driving. Acceleration 3.3 seconds (3.1 seconds
 the style of driving;
from 0 to with Corsa tyres)
The vehicle uses more fuel in the following  other non-technical factors such as 100 kph
situations: environmental influences or road
 at very low temperatures; conditions. Acceleration 3.2 seconds (3.0 seconds
from 0 to with Corsa tyres)
 in urban traffic on short trips; You can minimise CO2 emissions by driving
60 mph
 in mountainous terrain. conservatively and having your McLaren
serviced regularly.
McLaren is constantly updating its vehicles
using the latest technology. Depending on
when the fuel consumption tests were carried
out, it may be that the current consumption
values are different than those listed.
205

DATA
Gear ratios Vehicle dimensions
1st gear 3.9812:1

F
2nd gear 2.6134:1
3rd gear 1.9045:1
G
4th gear 1.4789:1
5th gear 1.1613:1

E
6th gear 0.9059:1
D B C
7th gear 0.6860:1
A
Final drive 3.3077:1
F Vehicle width 2093 mm (6 ft 11 in)

(doors closed
A Vehicle length 4509 mm (14 ft 10 in) including
mirrors)
B Wheelbase 2670 mm (8 ft 9 in)
G Vehicle height 1199 mm (4 ft)
C Rear overhang 783 mm (2 ft 8 in) (doors closed)
D Front overhang 1056 mm (3 ft 6 in)
E Ground 120 mm (5 in)

clearance
206

DATA
Turning circle Kerb weight distribution - 660 kg (1454

front axle lbs)
J Maximum gross vehicle 1690 kg

Turning circle kerb-to- 12.3 metres (41 ft) weight (GVW) (3726 lbs)
kerb
Maximum gross vehicle 794 kg (1750
K weight distribution - front lbs)
Vehicle weights axle
Maximum gross vehicle 896 kg (1975

weight distribution - rear axle lbs)
Dry weight 1336 kg
(2945 lbs) Maximum luggage load 50 kg (110
lbs)
Dry weight (with lightweight 1301 kg
options) (2868 lbs)
Unladen weight (all fluids 1434 kg
J Vehicle width 3120 mm (10 ft 3 in)
and 90% fuel) (3161 lbs)
(doors open at
widest point) Kerb weight (as above plus 1509 kg
75 kg driver) (3327 lbs)
K Vehicle height 1892 mm (6 ft 3 in)
(doors open) Kerb weight distribution - 854 kg (1882
rear axle lbs)
NOTE: All dimensions are approximate.
207

DATA
Winter tyres
Wheel and tyre sizes
Wheel sizes
Front tyres
- Pirelli SottoZero 235/35 R19

Front wheels 8.5J x 19
Rear wheels 11J x 20

Rear tyres
Summer tyres
- Pirelli SottoZero 295/30 R20
Front tyres
- Pirelli PZero MC1 235/35 R19
- Pirelli Corsa MC1 235/35 R19
Rear tyres
- Pirelli PZero MC1 305/30 R20
- Pirelli Corsa MC1 305/30 R20
208

DATA
Tyre pressures
Loading condition Front Rear
wheels wheels
R19 R20
Bar Psi Bar Psi
Bar Psi Bar Psi
Bar
2.2
2.3
R19
Psi
32
34
Bar
2.4
2.5
2.7
R20
Psi
35
36
39
>270kph/165mph
Normal use 2.0 29 2.2 32
36
2.5
>270kph/165mph
Speeds over 165 2.6 38 2.8 41

mph (270 kph)
The tyre pressures are given below and can

also be found on a label on the underside of the
fuel filler flap.
209

Service products Engine oil specification Fuel

Service products are fuel, engine oil, coolant WARNING: Fuel is highly flammable.
and brake fluid. McLaren recommends that you Fire, naked flames and smoking are
only use products tested and approved for therefore prohibited when handling fuels.
McLaren. Damage resulting from using non-
Switch off the engine before refuelling.
approved service products is not covered by
the liability for material defects. Engine oil capacity 8.0 litres WARNING: Do not allow fuel to come
into contact with skin or clothing.
WARNING: When handling, storing and
NOTE: McLaren recommends only Mobil Allowing fuels to come into direct contact
disposing of any service products,
1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil. with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is
please observe the relevant regulations.
Failure to do so could endanger people and You may obtain further information from a damaging to your health.
the environment. Do not allow service McLaren Dealer. For more information about fuel, see
products to come into direct contact with NOTE: Do not use any special lubricant Recommended fuel, page 98.
your eyes or open wounds. Contact a additives. These could lead to increased
doctor immediately if any service product is wear and damage to the mechanical Fuel tank
swallowed. assemblies. Damage caused by additives,
ENVIRONMENTAL: Dispose of service which are not approved, is not covered by the Total capacity 15.8 gal.
products in an environmentally McLaren warranty. (72 litres)
responsible manner.
Capacity remaining when low 2.4 UK gal.
level lamp illuminates (11 litres)
210

If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the

Coolant correct concentration, the boiling point of the Power steering fluid
coolant will be around 130°C (266°F). The Only use Pentosin CHF202 power steering
antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor concentration fluid.
Cooling system capacity 20.0 litres in the cooling system should be approximately
Antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor Mobil Extra 50% ±5%. This will protect the cooling system
Antifreeze against freezing in temperatures of -40°C (- Brake fluid
40°F). Only use Pentosin DoT 5.1 Brake fluid.
Antifreeze quantity for 10.0 litres
The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
protection to -20°C (-4°F)
concentration in the cooling system should not moisture from the air, this reduces its boiling
exceed 55%, which provides antifreeze point.
The coolant is a mixture of water, antifreeze
protection down to -45°C (-49°F), as a higher
and corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following WARNING: If the boiling point of the
concentration will not dissipate heat so
functions in the cooling system: brake fluid is reduced too much,
effectively.
 antifreeze protection; vapour pockets may form in the brake
If the vehicle is losing coolant, do not drive your system when the brakes are applied hard
 increased efficiency of the cooling system; vehicle and contact a McLaren Dealer. (e.g. when driving downhill or track driving)
 offers anti-corrosion protection.
impairing the braking efficiency. Therefore,
NOTE: Use Mobil Extra Antifreeze in all have the brake fluid replaced at the
climates, all year round. If coolant is not recommended service intervals.
used, the cooling system will not be sufficiently
protected from corrosion and the cooling
system efficiency will be reduced.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the engine,
only top-up with a pre-mixed coolant that
provides the desired level of antifreeze
protection.
211

TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
Bi-Xenon headlamps Brake steer

TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
Technical glossary
The Bi-Xenon headlamps provide greater Brake steer offers the benefits of a torque
Active dynamics control visibility for the driver, especially during vectoring differential, but is integrated into the
A system that allows the driver to change the adverse weather and driving conditions. The braking system reducing weight and providing
handling and performance characteristics of operational life of a Bi-Xenon bulb is excellent speed of response.
the vehicle. significantly longer than that of a conventional If the system detects that the car is starting to
headlamp bulb.
understeer through a corner, the inside rear
Airbrake brake is gently applied. This helps to increase
Brake Assist System
The airbrake is a moveable wing that enhances the yaw rate of the car, making the car feel
the vehicle's driving stability and braking Brake Assist System operates in emergency
more resistant to understeer. The lateral ‘g’
performance by increasing rear downforce. braking situations. If you depress the brake
force is also increased giving better handling
pedal quickly, Brake Assist System
characteristics.
Anti-lock Braking System automatically increases the force being applied
The Anti-lock Braking System prevents the to the brakes and thus shortens the stopping If the driver uses too much throttle exiting a
wheels from locking when you brake. This distance. corner, the inside rear wheel increases speed,
allows the vehicle to be steered during braking which without brake steer could cause the car
Brake disc wiping to become unstable. In this situation, brake
manoeuvres.
Brake disc wiping operates when the steer will again gently apply the brake on the
Automatic Driver Recognition cards windscreen wiper is switched on. It prevents inside rear wheel, thereby restoring traction
A card which must be on the person entering moisture build up on the brake discs during and stability.
the vehicle or the Tracker system signals that periods of heavy rain, by applying the brakes
the vehicle is being moved without momentarily, so that the pads touch the discs.
authorisation.
212

TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
Electronic brake pre-fill Handling control Parking sensors*

If the accelerator pedal is suddenly released, The handling control switch affects the The parking sensor system comprises four
the electronic brake pre-fill function following vehicle characteristics: ultrasonic sensors in the front bumper, four
immediately brings the brake pads into contact ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper and two
 Roll stiffness
with the discs, making for more rapid braking. sounders. When the parking sensors detect an
 Adaptive damping
obstructions while manoeuvring, the sounders
Electronic Stability Control  ESC settings provide an audible warning.
ESC monitors driving stability and traction
between the tyres and the road surface. Hill hold control Pre-cog
Hill hold control prevents roll-back on hill starts. 'Pre-cog' (or 'pre-cognition') means 'fore
Global Positioning System The brake system automatically applies the knowledge'. When the appropriate paddle is
By means of the appropriate receivers, satellite brakes until the accelerator is pressed. pulled to the first pressure point, this informs
signals supply information on the geographical the gearbox of an impending gear change. The
position of the vehicle. These signals are Launch control
gearbox then prepares for that change, and
compared with a digital map and used both to Launch control is designed to give the
when it is required, the change is performed
determine the position of the vehicle and for its maximum acceleration performance from a
instantaneously.
route guidance. standing start.
Keyless Entry
Keyless Entry allows the driver to unlock the
vehicle and disarm the alarm by simply opening
the door when the key is within 1.5 metres (5
feet) of the vehicle.
213

TECHNICAL GLOSSARY
Seamless Shift Gearbox Vehicle Identification Number

The seamless shift gearbox is a 7 speed, dual The vehicle identification number is a unique
clutch gearbox. Gear changes can be fully 17 digit number which provides information
automatic or driver controlled. The gear about your vehicle, as well as when and where
changes are almost instantaneous. It is this it was built.
coupled with uninterrupted torque delivery from Typical vehicle identification number =
the engine which provides the relentless
SBM11AAA5AW000001
acceleration.
Supplementary Restraint System

System comprises a number of air bags which
are automatically deployed in an accident to
provide additional occupant protection.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System *

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System constantly
checks the pressure and temperature in all four
tyres. It warns if the pressure drops or the
temperature rises in one or more of the tyres.
214
INDEX
INDEX
driver .................................................. 135 Brake disc wiping .....................................79

A passenger .......................................... 135 Brake fluid ..............................................211
Accelerator pedal position ....................... 67 temperature ....................................... 137 topping-up ..........................................159
Accessories ........................................... 202 Air distribution - air conditioning ............ 139 Brake pedal .............................................59
Active dynamics panel ............................ 71 Air vents ................................................ 139 Brakes
active button ........................................ 71 Airbrake ................................................... 83 Anti-lock Braking System .....................78
handling control ................................... 72 Alarm ....................................................... 18 Anti-lock Braking System warning light 79
launch control ...................................... 76 arming .................................................. 18 bedding-in ............................................94
powertrain control ................................ 74 disarming ............................................. 18 Brake Assist System ............................79
winter mode ......................................... 75 panic .................................................... 45 brake disc wiping .................................79
Active speed limiter ................................. 89 Anti-lock Braking System ........................ 78 brake steer ...........................................80
setting an upper speed limit ................. 89 Anti-trap protection - windows ............... 133 electronic brake pre-fill .........................80
Air bags ................................................... 32 Asymmetric tyres ................................... 187 foot .......................................................59
child passengers .................................. 36 Automatic light control ............................. 41 hill hold control .....................................79
deployment .......................................... 35 Automatic locking .................................... 14 parking .................................................57
front air bags ........................................ 33 Automatic mode - transmission ............... 68 warning light .........................................59
occupant classification system ............ 34 Automatic wipe ........................................ 46 Brake-steer ..............................................80
side head air bags ............................... 33 Breakdown ............................................. 197
Air conditioning ...................................... 134 Bulb replacement ...................................176
automatic mode ................................. 135
B
manual mode ..................................... 136 Battery fusebox ..................................... 174
MONO mode ..................................... 136
C
fuses .................................................. 174
switching on/off .................................. 135 Battery replacement - key fob ............... 182 Capacities ..............................................210
Air conditioning controls ........................ 134 Battery safety ........................................ 164 cooling system ...................................211
air distribution .................................... 139 Belts - seat .............................................. 29 engine oil ............................................210
air vents ............................................. 139 Blower speed - air conditioning ............. 138 fuel tank ............................................. 210
air-recirculation mode ........................ 140 Boost starting ........................................ 165 Car cover ...............................................151
blower speed ..................................... 138 brake - topping-up ................................. 159 Changing wheels ...................................190
demisting ........................................... 140 Brake Assist System ............................... 79 Checking engine oil ...............................154
215
INDEX
Child passengers ..................................... 36 Daytime running lamps ............................43 Driving safety systems ............................ 78
Child restraint systems ............................ 36 Defrosting ..............................................140
Child restraints Demisting ...............................................140
KISI child seat function ........................ 38 Deployment - air bags ..............................35 E
Cleaning the exterior ............................. 192 Dimensions ............................................206 Economical driving .................................. 63
Cleaning the instruments and display Dipped beam headlamps .........................42 Electric seat
screens .................................................. 195 Direction indicators ..................................44 lumbar adjustment ............................... 25
Cleaning the interior .............................. 195 Discharged battery .....................................9 Electric seat and mirror memory ............. 25
Clock ...................................................... 122 Discharged key fob battery Electric seats ........................................... 24
Closing engine cover ............................... 15 starting the engine ..............................179 forward or rearward adjustment .......... 24
Closing the luggage compartment ........... 17 Display messages ..................................123 height adjustment ................................ 25
Closing windows .................................... 132 Display screen cleaning .........................195 seat backrest rake adjustment ............ 24
Coolant .................................................. 211 Door mirror heating ..................................40 Electrical status ....................................... 50
topping-up .......................................... 157 Doors .........................................................8 Electronic brake pre-fill ........................... 80
Cover - engine ......................................... 15 automatic locking .................................14 Electronic Stability Control ...................... 80
closing .................................................. 15 closing from outside .............................13 deactivating ......................................... 81
opening ................................................ 15 locking ..................................................11 reactivating .......................................... 82
Cruise control .......................................... 90 locking and unlocking from inside ........12 Emergency fuel filling funnel ................. 163
cancelling ............................................. 92 manual opening from inside ...............180 Emissions .............................................. 205
decreasing speed ................................. 93 opening from inside ..............................13 Engine ..................................................... 60
increasing speed .................................. 92 opening from inside - discharged battery . emissions .......................................... 205
resuming speed ................................... 93 .............................................................180 fuel consumption ............................... 205
setting .................................................. 91 opening from outside ............................10 loud start .............................................. 61
Cup holder ............................................. 150 Drink holder ...........................................150 power output ...................................... 204
Driver air conditioning controls ..............135 running in ............................................. 94
Driving abroad .......................................199 starting ................................................. 60
D Driving away ............................................62 stopping ............................................... 61
Data ....................................................... 204 Driving in winter .......................................99 technical data .................................... 204
Date display ........................................... 122 Driving precautions ................................188 warning light ........................................ 63
216
INDEX
Engine cover ........................................... 15 main fusebox ......................................172

closing ................................................. 15 F replacement .......................................168
opening ................................................ 15 Features
Engine immobiliser .................................. 18 12V Socket ........................................ 151
Engine oil .............................................. 154 stowage compartment ....................... 149
G
capacity ............................................. 210 stowage net ....................................... 148 Gear position indicator ...........................126
checking ............................................ 154 sun visors ........................................... 148 Gear positions .........................................55
specification ....................................... 210 Filling with fuel ......................................... 96 Gear ratios ............................................. 206
topping-up .......................................... 155 Fire extinguisher .................................... 163 Gearbox ...................................................66
usage ................................................. 154 First-aid kit ............................................. 162 gear positions ....................................... 66
Engine oil level warnings ....................... 154 Fluid ....................................................... 159 gearshift paddles ..................................69
Engine oil temperature warnings ........... 156 brake .................................................. 211 kickdown ..............................................67
Entry lighting ......................................... 148 power steering ................................... 211 pre-cog .................................................70
Equipment ............................................. 161 power steering - topping-up ............... 158 Gearbox mode indicator ........................ 122
luggage compartment ........................ 161 Foot brake ............................................... 59 Gearbox modes ....................................... 68
Exit lighting ............................................ 148 Force limiters - seat belts ........................ 31 Gearbox oil topping-up ..........................156
Exterior mirror memory ........................... 25 Front air bags .......................................... 33 Genuine McLaren parts and accessories ....
Exterior mirrors ........................................ 39 Fuel ......................................................... 96 ................................................................ 202
heating ................................................. 40 Fuel consumption .................................. 205 Glossary - technical ...............................212
mirror automatic fold ............................ 40 Fuel funnel ............................................. 163
mirror fold ............................................ 40 Fuel level display ................................... 130
reverse dip ........................................... 40 Fuel quality .............................................. 98 H
Extinguisher .......................................... 163 Fuel safety ............................................. 210
Eye - towing .......................................... 162 Handling control ....................................... 72
Fuel tank ................................................ 210
Hazard warning lamps .............................44
Funnel - fuel .......................................... 163
Headlamp flasher ....................................42
Fusebox
Headlamp wash ....................................... 47
main ................................................... 169
Headlamp washers ................................160
Fuses ..................................................... 168
Headlamps ..............................................42
battery fusebox .................................. 174
Headlamps - main beam .........................42
217
INDEX
Heated rear screen ................................ 141 speedometer ......................................102

Heated seats ........................................... 27 tachometer .........................................102 L
Hill hold control ........................................ 79 trip computer ......................................121 Lamps - side ........................................... 42
Horn ......................................................... 28 vehicle info .........................................117 Launch control ........................................ 76
water temperature display ..................129 Left-hand display ................................... 103
Interchanging wheels .............................190 clock .................................................. 122
I Interior accessory power socket ............151 home screen ...................................... 106
Identification number - vehicle ............... 203 Interior lighting .......................................147 messages .......................................... 123
Ignition - switching on .............................. 51 courtesy lighting .................................147 settings .............................................. 107
Immobiliser .............................................. 18 Interior mirror ...........................................39 trip computer ..................................... 121
In gear speeds ....................................... 205 Interior motion sensor ..............................20 vehicle info ........................................ 117
Individual settings .................................... 12 Introduction ................................................2 Left-hand display overview ..................... 52
Inspecting tyres ..................................... 187 Lifting points - vehicle ........................... 196
Inspecting wheels .................................. 187 Light switch ............................................. 41
J Lighting
Instruments
cleaning .............................................. 195 Jacking the vehicle ................................196 automatic control ................................. 41
clock ................................................... 122 Jump starting .........................................165 courtesy lighting ................................ 147
display messages .............................. 123 day time running lamps ....................... 43
display window ................................... 126 dipped beam ........................................ 42
fuel level display ................................. 130 K direction indicators .............................. 44
gear position indicator ........................ 126 hazard warning .................................... 44
Key fob battery replacement ..................182
gearbox mode indicator ..................... 122 headlamp flash .................................... 42
Key fob entry ..............................................9
handling and powertrain display ........ 127 interior ............................................... 147
Key fob stowing .........................................9
home screen ...................................... 106 main beam ........................................... 42
Keyless entry .............................................8
left-hand display ................................. 103 parking lights ....................................... 45
Kickdown .................................................67
oil temperature display ....................... 128 rear fog lamp ....................................... 43
Kit - first-aid ............................................162
overview ............................................. 102 sidelamps ............................................ 42
Kit - tyre repair .......................................190
right-hand display ............................... 126 switch .................................................. 41
settings ............................................... 107 Locking .................................................... 11
218
INDEX
automatic ............................................. 14 Mirrors ..................................................... 39 Overview

mis-lock ............................................... 12 exterior ................................................. 39 left-hand display ...................................52
Locking from inside ................................. 12 exterior mirror fold ................................ 40 right-hand display .................................54
Luggage compartment ............................ 16 interior .................................................. 39 Owner documentation ...........................150
closing ................................................. 17 reverse dip ........................................... 40
manual opening ................................. 181 Mis-lock ................................................... 12
opening - discharged battery ............. 181 Motion sensor - interior ............................ 20 P
unlocking and opening ......................... 16 Panic alarm ..............................................45
Luggage compartment equipment ........ 161 Parking brake ..........................................57
O
Parking lights ...........................................45
M Odometer .............................................. 106 Parking sensors ....................................... 64
Oil Parts ......................................................202
Main beam .............................................. 42 engine ................................................ 210 Passenger air conditioning controls .......135
Main fusebox ......................................... 169 level ................................................... 154 Passengers - child ...................................36
fuses .................................................. 169 Oil - gearbox .......................................... 156 Power output
Main instruments overview ...................... 52 Oil level engine ................................................204
Manual mode - air conditioning ............. 136 check ................................................. 154 Power steering fluid ...............................211
Manual mode - transmission ................... 68 top-up ................................................. 155 Power steering fluid - topping-up ...........158
Manual seats ........................................... 22 Oil level warnings - engine .................... 154 Powertrain control ....................................74
backrest rake adjustment .................... 22 Oil temperature display ......................... 128 Precautions - driving ..............................188
forward and rearward adjustment ........ 22 Oil temperature warnings - engine ........ 156 Pressures - tyre ..................................... 209
height adjustment ................................ 23 Opening a door Pressures - tyres ...................................189
Manual unlocking .................................. 177 from inside ........................................... 13 Products - service ..................................210
McLaren Assistance .............................. 197 from outside ......................................... 10 Puncture repair kit .................................190
McLaren parts and accessories ............ 202 Opening and closing the vents .............. 139
Mirror Opening engine cover ............................. 15
automatic exterior mirror fold ............... 40 Opening windows .................................. 132 Q
heating ................................................. 40 Operating temperatures - vehicle .......... 204 Quick guide ............................................150
Mirror memory ......................................... 25 Outside temperature display ................. 106
219
INDEX
Right-hand display overview ....................54 electric seat adjustment ....................... 24

R Running in ................................................94 electric seat and mirror memory .......... 25
Rain sensor ............................................. 46 electric seat backrest rake adjustment 24
Ratios - gear .......................................... 206 electric seat forward or rearward adjust-
Reading lights ........................................ 147
S ment .................................................... 24
Rear fog lamp .......................................... 43 Safety .......................................................29 electric seat height adjustment ............ 25
Rear screen heating .............................. 141 air bags ................................................32 electric seat lumbar adjustment ........... 25
Rear spoiler ............................................. 83 battery ................................................164 heated seats ........................................ 27
Recirculation mode - air conditioning .... 140 car washes .............................................9 manual adjustment .............................. 22
Recommended fuel quality ...................... 98 footwells ...............................................38 manual seat backrest rake adjustment 22
Recovery of your vehicle ....................... 198 fuel .....................................................210 manual seat forward and rearward adjust-
Refuelling ................................................. 96 mirrors ..................................................39 ment .................................................... 22
Replacement battery ............................. 197 seat belts ..............................................29 manual seat height adjustment ........... 23
Replacement fuses ................................ 168 seats .....................................................21 Secondary fusebox ............................... 172
Replacing Sealant - tyre .........................................162 fuses .................................................. 172
bulbs .................................................. 176 Seamless Shift Gearbox ..........................66 Sensor - interior motion ........................... 20
key fob battery ................................... 182 gear positions .......................................66 Sensors
wiper blade ......................................... 184 gearshift paddles ..................................69 parking ................................................. 64
Restraint System ..................................... 32 kickdown ..............................................67 Service and Warranty ........................... 150
Restraints - child ...................................... 36 pre-cog .................................................70 Service products ................................... 210
Restraints - KISI child seat function ......... 38 Seamless Shift Gearbox mode ................68 Setting up warning triangle ................... 161
Rev counter ........................................... 102 Seat belt warning light .............................31 Settings - individual ................................. 12
Right-hand display ................................. 126 Seat belts Side head air bags .................................. 33
display window ................................... 126 force limiters .........................................31 Sidelamps ............................................... 42
fuel level ............................................. 130 safety ....................................................29 Snow chains .......................................... 100
gear position indicator ........................ 126 tensioners .............................................31 Specification - engine oil ....................... 210
handling and powertrain display ........ 127 wearing .................................................31 Speedometer ........................................ 102
oil temperature ................................... 128 Seat safety ...............................................21 Speeds - in gear .................................... 205
water temperature .............................. 129 Seats ........................................................21 Spoiler ..................................................... 83
220
INDEX
START/STOP button ............................... 51 Symbols ..................................................... 4 markings ............................................186

Starting and driving ................................. 50 pressures ...........................................189
foot brake ............................................. 59 Tyre monitoring system ...........................86
gear positions ...................................... 55 T Tyre pressures .......................................209
gearshift paddles ................................. 56 Tachometer ........................................... 102 Tyre repair kit .........................................190
instruments and warning lights ............ 52 Technical data Tyre sealant ...........................................162
main instruments ................................. 52 engine ................................................ 204 Tyres ............................................. 185, 187
parking brake ....................................... 57 Technical glossary ................................. 212 inspecting ...........................................187
starting the engine ............................... 60 Temperature - air conditioning .............. 137 summer ..............................................208
switching on the ignition ...................... 51 Temperature display .............................. 106 winter .................................................208
warning lights ....................................... 53 Tensioners - seat belt .............................. 31
Starting the engine .................................. 60 Topping up
loud start .............................................. 61 U
headlamp washers ............................. 160
Starting the vehicle Topping-up ............................................ 154 Unlocking - discharged battery ..............177
discharged key fob battery ................ 179 brake fluid .......................................... 159 Unlocking and opening the luggage compart-
Steering column ...................................... 28 coolant ............................................... 157 ment .........................................................16
Steering wheel ........................................ 28 engine oil ........................................... 155 Unlocking from inside ..............................12
Steering wheel - horn .............................. 28 gearbox oil ......................................... 156 Upper speed limit
Steering wheel adjustment ...................... 28 power steering fluid ............................ 158 setting ..................................................89
Stopping the engine ................................ 61 Tow-away protection ............................... 19
Stowage compartment/audio interface .. 149 Towing ................................................... 198
Stowage net .......................................... 148 Towing eye ............................................ 162 V
Stowing the key fob ................................... 9 Track driving ............................................ 95
Summer tyres ........................................ 208 Vehicle dimensions ................................206
Tracking system .................................... 142 Vehicle electrical status ...........................50
Sun visors ............................................. 148 Traction control system ........................... 81
Supplementary Restraint System ............ 32 Vehicle fuel consumption .......................205
Triangle - warning .................................. 161 Vehicle identification number .................203
Switch - lighting ....................................... 41 Turning circle ......................................... 207
Switching air conditioning on/off ............ 135 Vehicle lifting points ...............................196
Tyre Vehicle operating temperatures .............204
Switching on the ignition ......................... 51 asymmetric ........................................ 187 Vehicle speeds ......................................205
221
INDEX
Vehicle starting Washing the vehicle ...............................192

discharged key fob battery ................. 179 Water temperature display .....................129
Vehicle Tracking .................................... 142 Wearing seat belts ...................................31
Vehicle use .............................................. 95 Weights ..................................................207
Vehicle washing ..................................... 192 Wheel - steering .......................................28
Vehicle weights ...................................... 207 Wheel sizes ...........................................208
Vents ..................................................... 139 Wheels ...................................................185
Viewing tyre temperatures ....................... 88 inspecting ...........................................187
Volumetric alarm ...................................... 20 interchanging ......................................190
Window demisting ..................................140
Windows
W anti-trap protection .............................133
Warning opening and closing ...........................132
engine oil temperature ....................... 156 Windscreen washers .............................160
Warning light Windscreen wiper ....................................46
Anti-lock Braking System ..................... 79 rain sensor ...........................................46
brakes .................................................. 59 single wipe ...........................................47
engine .................................................. 63 wash/wipe ............................................47
seat belt ............................................... 31 Winter driving ...........................................99
Supplementary Restraint System ........ 35 Winter mode ............................................75
Warning lights Winter tyres ............................................208
left-hand side ....................................... 53 Wiper blade replacement .......................184
right-hand side ..................................... 54
Warning triangle .................................... 161
Warnings - engine oil level .................... 154
Wash - headlamp .................................... 47
Washers
headlamp ........................................... 160
windscreen ......................................... 160
222

McLaren MP4-12C - Maintenance Manual - Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

McLaren MP4-12C - Maintenance Manual - Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

McLaren MP4-12C - Maintenance Manual - Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Repair Procedures: Suspension – Z-Bar 141

Suspension – Wheel Alignment 144

1. Open luggage compartment lid.

Care Start pulling up cover fender from

2. Remove fender inner (1).

Install fender cover - Inner

1. Install components in reverse order.

Care Use suitable headlamp alignment equipment.

1. Use adjuster for vertical adjustment (1).

2. Use adjuster for horizontal adjustment (2).

Care Height equals 62cm with

3. Carry out adjustment to country specific

2. Remove contents of luggage bin.

3. Remove luggage bin finisher.

4. Remove bolts (1). M6 x 16 4 Nm

5. Remove fixings (2).

6. Remove luggage bin (3).

Install luggage bin - Rear

Fill/bleed fluid - Steering system

2. Remove power steering reservoir cap (1).

3. Fill up power steering reservoir (1.5 litres

Care Ensure the car is on the ground.

4. Turn steering wheel from lock (A) to lock (B)

4. Turn steering wheel from lock (A) to lock (B)

1. The following conditions must be met to allow

Care The foot brake must be applied for

Care The oil level status can be viewed

2. Start the engine and navigate to the left hand

2. Start the engine and navigate to the left hand

Care Allow the engine oil temperature to

Care The oil level check will limit the

4. Apply throttle and raise the engine speed to

Care Once the oil level check has been

5. When the timer has reached '0

Care When the timer has reached '0

Care The engine must be switched off

6. If the engine oil is below target level, top up

5. When the timer has reached '0

Care When the timer has reached '0

Care The engine must be switched off

6. If the engine oil is below target level, top up

Care Ensure lifting arm pads do not

1. Carefully position lifting arms on jacking points

1. Install components in reverse order.

2. Check tyre pressure and correct, if necessary.

Care Once vehicle is on ground.

2. AA-RM-03B03-01-001 Remove/install wheels

3. AA-RM-03C01-01-002 Remove/install brake caliper - front

5. AA-RM-03C01-01-003 Remove/install brake - Disc - front

6. AA-RM-03C02-01-002 Remove/install caliper parking brake

7. AA-RM-03C01-03-001 Remove/install brake caliper - rear

9. AA-RM-03C01-03-002 Remove/install brake disc - rear

Care Do not machine cross drilled holes.

Care Do not flare cross drilled holes.

Care Do not carry out any form of grinding on the disc.

Cleaning cross drilled holes

2. Once all holes are cleared, use a pressurised

Disc replacement required

1. If required, replace disc.

Checking Iron brake disc – Visual inspection of surface/ wear